NEC DSX Software Manual
  1. Manuals
  2. Brands
  3. NEC Manuals
  4. Telephone System
  5. DSX
  6. Software manual

NEC DSX Software Manual

Hide thumbs Also See for DSX:
1
2
Table Of Contents
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
100
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
120
121
122
123
124
125
126
127
128
129
130
131
132
133
134
135
136
137
138
139
140
141
142
143
144
145
146
147
148
149
150
151
152
153
154
155
156
157
158
159
160
161
162
163
164
165
166
167
168
169
170
171
172
173
174
175
176
177
178
179
180
181
182
183
184
185
186
187
188
189
190
191
192
193
194
195
196
197
198
199
200
201
202
203
204
205
206
207
208
209
210
211
212
213
214
215
216
217
218
219
220
221
222
223
224
225
226
227
228
229
230
231
232
233
234
235
236
237
238
239
240
241
242
243
244
245
246
247
248
249
250
251
252
253
254
255
256
257
258
259
260
261
262
263
264
265
266
267
268
269
270
271
272
273
274
275
276
277
278
279
280
281
282
283
284
285
286
287
288
289
290
291
292
293
294
295
296
297
298
299
300
301
302
303
304
305
306
307
308
309
310
311
312
313
314
315
316
317
318
319
320
321
322
323
324
325
326
327
328
329
330
331
332
333
334
335
336
337
338
339
340
341
342
343
344
345
346
347
348
349
350
351
352
353
354
355
356
357
358
359
360
361
362
363
364
365
366
367
368
369
370
371
372
373
374
375
376
377
378
379
380
381
382
383
384
385
386
387
388
389
390
391
392
393
394
395
396
397
398
399
400
401
402
403
404
405
406
407
408
409
410
411
412
413
414
415
416
417
418
419
420
421
422
423
424
425
426
427
428
429
430
431
432
433
434
435
436
437
438
439
440
441
442
443
444
445
446
447
448
449
450
451
452
453
454
455
456
457
458
459
460
461
462
463
464
465
466
467
468
469
470
471
472
473
474
475
476
477
478
479
480
481
482
483
484
485
486
487
488
489
490
491
492
493
494
495
496
497
498
499
500
501
502
503
504
505
506
507
508
509
510
511
512
513
514
515
516
517
518
519
520
521
522
523
524
525
526
527
528
529
530
531
532
533
534
535
536
537
538
539
540
541
542
543
544
545
546
547
548
549
550
551
552
553
554
555
556
557
558
559
560
561
562
563
564
565
566
567
568
569
570
571
572
573
574
575
576
577
578
579
580
581
582
583
584
585
586
587
588
589
590
591
592
593
594
595
596
597
598
599
600
601
602
603
604
605
606
607
608
609
610
611
612
613
614
615
616
617
618
619
620
621
622
623
624
625
626
627
628
629
630
631
632
633
634
635
636
637
638
639
640
641
642
643
644
645
646
647
648
649
650
651
652
653
654
655
656
657
658
659
660
661
662
663
664
665
666
667
668
669
670
671
672
673
674
675
676
677
678
679
680
681
682
683
684
685
686
687
688
689
690
691
692
693
694
695
696
697
698
699
700
701
702
703
704
705
706
707
708
709
710
711
712
713
714
715
716
717
718
719
720
721
722
723
724
725
726
727
728
729
730
731
732
733
734
735
736
737
738
739
740
741
742
743
744
745
746
747
748
749
750
751
752
753
754
755
756
757
758
759
760
761
762
763
764
765
766
767
768
769
770
771
772
773
774
775
776
777
778
779
780
781
782
783
784
785
786
787
788
789
790
791
792
793
794
795
796
797
798
799
800
801
802
803
804
805
806
807
808
809
810
811
812
813
814
815
816
817
818
819
820
821
822
823
824
825
826
827
828
829
830
831
832
833
834
835
836
837
838
839
840
841
842
843
844
845
846
847
848
849
850
851
852
853
854
855
856
857
858
859
860
861
862
863
864
865
866
867
868
869
870
871
872
873
874
875
876
877
878
879
880
881
882
883
884
885
886
887
888
889
890
891
892
893
894
895
896
897
898
899
900
901
902
903
904
905
906
907
908
909
910
911
912
913
914
915
916
917
918
919
920
921
922
923
924
925
926
927
928
929
930
931
932
933
934
935
936
937
938
939
940
941
942
943
944
945
946
947
948
949
950
951
952
953
954
955
956
957
958
959
960
961
962
963
964
965
966
967
968
969
970
971
972
973
974
975
976
977
978
979
980
981
982
983
984
Table of Contents

Advertisement

Quick Links

See also: Feature Handbook , User Manual
Empowered by Innovation
Software Manual
P/N 1093100
Rev 3, June 2006
Printed in U.S.A
.
01.00.00
For additional resources, visit our Technical Support site on the web at
.
http://www.necdsx.com

Advertisement

Table of Contents
loading
Need help?

Need help?

Do you have a question about the DSX and is the answer not in the manual?

Questions and answers

Lynda Kinney
July 1, 2025

Where would I find troubleshooting abilities in a manual?

0
Lynda Kinney
July 1, 2025

I have lost the original greeting that the guy who installed our phone system did for us. I have a user guide that does not show how to reset the phone or whatever I need to do. The menu isn't showing "greeting" anymore or giving me the ability to set a new message. It seems like my phone is totally messed up.

0

Subscribe to Our Youtube Channel

Related Manuals for NEC DSX

Summary of Contents for NEC DSX

  • Page 1 Empowered by Innovation Software Manual P/N 1093100 Rev 3, June 2006 Printed in U.S.A 01.00.00 For additional resources, visit our Technical Support site on the web at http://www.necdsx.com...
  • Page 2 This manual has been developed by NEC Unified Solutions, Inc. It is intended for the use of its customers and service personnel, and should be read in its entirety before attempting to install or program the system. Any comments or suggestions for improving this manual would be appreciated.

  • Page 3: Table Of Contents

    Table of Contents Table of Contents Table of Contents Introduction ............1 Using the DSX Software Manual .
  • Page 4 Table of Contents Call Coverage Keys ........... . . 40 Call Coverage Guard Timer .
  • Page 5 Table of Contents How Call Forwarding and Extension Hunting Interact with DID Calls... 102 DID Call Handling with Call Forwarding and Extension Hunting ....103 DID Station Intercept and Line Overflow .
  • Page 6 Table of Contents User Programmable Feature ..........197 Headset Compatibility .
  • Page 7 Table of Contents Basic Night Service Types ..........252 Off-Hook Signaling .
  • Page 8 Table of Contents Name Programming Chart ..........303 Silent Monitor .
  • Page 9 Table of Contents Voice Mail ............372 Call Forwarding to Voice Mail.
  • Page 10 Table of Contents IntraMail Features ........... 395 Introduction .
  • Page 11 Table of Contents External Transfer ............483 Fax Detection .
  • Page 12 Table of Contents Message Storage Limit ..........548 Message Waiting Lamp .
  • Page 13 Table of Contents System Options: 1001-1702 ......... . . 595 10xx-Configuration .
  • Page 14 Table of Contents 1212-01: Line Port Assignment ......... 615 1213-T1/E1 Card Setup .
  • Page 15 Table of Contents 1403-05: FSK Message Waiting Lamp for Single Line Set ....636 1403-06: Loop Disconnect for Single Line Set ......636 1404-Caller ID .
  • Page 16 Table of Contents 1512-Calls ............. . .657 1512-01: Automatic Handsfree.
  • Page 17 Table of Contents 1603-03: Exclusive Hold Recall Timer ........675 1603-04: Park Orbit Recall Timer .
  • Page 18 Table of Contents 1631-05: Receive Dial Pulse Maximum Make Timer ......696 1631-06: Receive Minimum Flash Timer........696 1631-07: Receive Maximum Flash Timer .
  • Page 19 Table of Contents 1654-04: GB Tone Complete Timer........712 1654-05: GC Response Timer .
  • Page 20 Table of Contents Stations: 2101-2501 ..........719 21xx-Configuration .
  • Page 21 Table of Contents 2113-04: Privacy Group ..........740 2113-05: Page Group (Zone) .
  • Page 22 Table of Contents 2143-02: Auto Erase/Save of Messages ........769 2143-03: Auto Time Stamp .
  • Page 23 Table of Contents 2311-01: UCD Group Mailbox Type ........793 2311-01: UCD Group Routing Mailbox Number.
  • Page 24 Table of Contents Lines: 3101-3715 ........... . 809 31xx-Configuration .
  • Page 25 Table of Contents 314x-TIE Line ........... . . 830 3141-Dialing .
  • Page 26 Table of Contents 3531-02: Table Type (Allow or Deny) ........846 3532-Table Entries .
  • Page 27 Table of Contents Voice Mail Options: 4101-4231 ......... 863 41xx-Configuration .
  • Page 28 Table of Contents 4212-[01-10]: Schedule End Time ........886 Type 1 (Day of Week) Schedule Example .
  • Page 29 Table of Contents Maintenance Options: 9001 - 9042 ........915 90xx-Utilities .
  • Page 30 Table of Contents xxviii ◆ Table of Contents DSX Software Manual...

  • Page 31: Introduction

    Introduction Using the DSX Software Manual Using the DSX Software Manual How the Manual is Organized This manual describes the features and programming of the DSX telephone system. It is divided into eight chapters as follows: Introduction ❥ This is the chapter you are reading now. It provides information about the DSX system’s default feature setup and basic startup programming.

  • Page 32: Default Feature Setup

    Default Feature Setup Default Feature Setup Default Features Default Features for Lines All lines are loop start DTMF. • Use 3101-01: Line Type (page 809) to change this assignment. In DSX-80/160, lines 1-12 ring on line keys 1-12 for extensions 300-315. •...
  • Page 33 Default Feature Setup Initial Startup Programming Enter the programming mode. From any display telephone: - Press INTERCOM + Dial #*#* - Enter the system password + HOLD The system passwords are: 632379 (NECDSX) for Installer (level 3) for System Administrator 2 (level 2) 9999 for System Administrator 1 (level 1) 0000...
  • Page 34 Default Feature Setup Checking your System’s Software Level How to Check your System’s Software Level To check your system’s software level: Press INTERCOM . Dial #*#* . • The system software level shows on the first line of your display. •...

  • Page 35: Charts

    Charts Charts DSX Dial Codes by Feature (Page 1 of 2) For this feature Dial this code When you are Barging-In on a co-worker’s call Barge In (Intrusion) Canceling Call Forwarding at an INTERCOM Call Forwarding extension + Extension or 0 Enabling Call Forwarding Busy/No INTERCOM (for the operator)
  • Page 36 Charts (Page 2 of 2) DSX Dial Codes by Feature For this feature Dial this code When you are Setting up Monitor after calling a busy Monitor / Silent Monitor co-worker + UNA code (01-04) Answering a call ringing UNA at Night Service / Night Ring night INTERCOM...
  • Page 37 Charts System Number Plan/Capacities (Page 1 of 2) DSX40 DSX80/160 System Options Classes of Service 1-15 (COS 1 normally reserved for attendants) Conference 32 simultaneous users in Conference (total of all Conferences system-wide) 8 simultaneous Conferences maximum 8 parties maximum in any one Conference Extension Hunting (UCD) Master Numbers Extension Hunting Groups...
  • Page 38 Charts System Number Plan/Capacities (Page 2 of 2) DSX40 DSX80/160 Analog Door Boxes, Built-In Analog Door Boxes, Total The maximum number of DSX Analog Door Boxes you can install is determined by the number of 2PGDAD Modules, which in turn is limited only by the availability of 16ESIU station ports.

  • Page 39: Telephone Illustrations

    Telephone Illustrations Telephone Illustrations Ring/Message Lamp Thu June 8 11:52 AM Pat Smith x301 Menu Dir VM:00 CL:00 Alpanumeric Display CHECK CLEAR Speed Dial Bin keys Soft keys Feature keys In DSX-40: Keys 1-8 are line keys. Line 1 Line 2 Line 3 Line 4 Line 5...
  • Page 40 Telephone Illustrations Ring/Message Lamp Thu June 8 11:52 AM Pat Smith x301 Menu Dir VM:00 CL:00 Alpanumeric Display CHECK CLEAR Speed Dial Bin keys Soft keys Feature keys Line 1 Line 2 Line 3 Line 4 Line 5 Line 6 In DSX-40: Keys 1-8 are line keys.
  • Page 41 Telephone Illustrations Ring/Message Lamp CHECK CLEAR Thu June 8 11:52 AM Pat Smith x301 Alpanumeric Display Menu Director Soft keys V-Mail 00 Soft keys Calls 00 SP Dial 1 Pa e SP Dial 2 Feature keys Line 1 Line 2 Line 3 Line 4 Line 5...
  • Page 42 Telephone Illustrations Page 1 Page 2 Page 3 Park 60 Park 61 CALL Park 62 Park 63 Park 64 Park 65 Park 66 Night ANSWER RELEASE TRANSFER 60-Button DSS Console 12 ◆ Introduction DSX Software Manual...

  • Page 43: Features

    Features Introduction Introduction How To Use This Chapter This chapter provides detailed information on the system’s features. The features in this chapter are in alpha- betical order, like a dictionary, and are subdivided into headings as follows: Description ❥ Read Description to get an overview of the feature. Along with the feature’s description is the Default Setting, which outlines how the feature works with the default (factory installed) programming.

  • Page 44: Account Codes

    Account Codes Account Codes Description Use Account codes to categorize and/or restrict outside calls. Account Codes are user-dialed codes that help categorize and/or restrict outside calls. Account Codes are from 2-10 digits long, using any combination of the digits 0-9. There are three types of Account Codes: Optional (Unforced Account Codes) ❥...

  • Page 45: Account Codes And Emergency Calls

    Account Codes An extension user can preselect a line for a Last Number Redial or Save call. Account Codes and Emergency Calls Account Codes are never enforced for emergency (911 and 1+911) calls. DSS Console Account Code Key A keyset user can have an Account Code key on their DSS Console. It works the same as a keyset Account Code key.
  • Page 46 Account Codes Setting Up Forced Account Codes Should an extension have Forced Account Codes (i.e., be required to enter an Account Code while placing an outside call)? In 2102-01: Class of Service (page 724), check the extension’s Class of Service level. If yes (enable Forced Account Codes), in 1412-04: Forced Account Codes (page 651) for the extension’s Class of Service level, enter Yes .

  • Page 47: Programming Examples

    Account Codes Programming Examples Forced Account Codes Require an Account Code only for 900 and 1 + 900 Long Distance Calls. In 1412-04: Forced Account Codes (page 651), enter In 1412-06: Account Codes for Toll Calls Only (page 651), enter In 1551-04: Account Code Toll Restriction Level (page 668), enter (for example).
  • Page 48 Account Codes Forced Account Codes Allow 800 and 1 + 800 Long Distance Dialing without an Account Code. In 1412-04: Forced Account Codes (page 651), enter Yes . In 1412-06: Account Codes for Toll Calls Only (page 651), enter Yes . In 1551-04: Account Code Toll Restriction Level (page 668), enter 2 (for example).
  • Page 49 Account Codes Other Related Features Features Central Office Calls, Placing (page 78) • You can use Store and Forward with Forced Account Codes. Last Number Redial (page 219) and Save Number Dialed (page 298) • Last Number Redial and Save do not store Account Codes. This means that the user must manually enter an Account Code to have it included with a call redialed using Last Number Redial and Save.
  • Page 50 Account Codes In these instructions: Forced Account Codes [Super Display Soft Key] [Super Display Soft Key] - [Keyset Soft Key] [Keyset Soft Key] • Forced Account Codes may prevent Speed Dial from dialing 911 emergency services. • Forced Account Codes do not apply to incoming calls. To enter a Forced Account Code: Access a line for an outgoing call.

  • Page 51: Alphanumeric Display

    Alphanumeric Display Alphanumeric Display Description The Alphanumeric Display messages help the display telephone user process calls, identify callers and customize features. The 22- and 34-Button Display Telephones have a three-line, 24-character per line alphanumeric display. The first line displays the date and time (while idle) and feature status messages. The second line is used extensively by IntraMail.

  • Page 52: Attendant Call Queuing

    Attendant Call Queuing Attendant Call Queuing Description Attendant Call Queuing helps minimize call congestion in systems that use the attendant as the overflow destination for unanswered calls. An unlimited number of callers can queue for the attendant. The callers hear ringback while they wait for the attendant to answer —...
  • Page 53 Attendant Call Queuing Operation In these instructions: Attendant Call Queuing [Super Display Soft Key] [Super Display Soft Key] - [Keyset Soft Key] [Keyset Soft Key] To answer a call flashing the Operator Call Key: Press the flashing Operator Call key. Features ◆...

  • Page 54: Attendant Position

    Attendant Position Attendant Position Description The attendant is the system’s call processing focal point. The attendant is the focal point for call processing within the system. The system can have up to four atten- dants. In addition to the features of a standard keyset, the attendant also has the following unique capabilities (refer to the respective feature for details): Attendant Call Queuing (page 22) ❥...
  • Page 55 Attendant Position Programming For best performance, install a 34-Button Display or 34-Button Super Display telephone for the attendant. A DSS Console will also help the attendant process calls more quickly. Set up the system attendants (operators). For a single operator: - In 1501-01: Number of Operators (page 652), enter - In 1502-01: Operator Number 1 (page 653), enter the extension number for operator 1.
  • Page 56 Attendant Position Other Related Features Features Barge In (Intrusion) (page 36) Since the attendant is never busy, Intercom callers cannot Barge In on an attendant. Call Coverage Keys (page 40) A Call Coverage Key will not pick up a call ringing the attendant’s Operator Call Key. Call Waiting / Camp-On (page 58) Since the attendant is never busy, Intercom callers cannot Camp-On to an attendant.
  • Page 57 Attendant Position Operation In these instructions: Attendant Position [Super Display Soft Key] [Super Display Soft Key] - [Keyset Soft Key] [Keyset Soft Key] To call the attendant: Press INTERCOM • You hear dial tone. Dial • You hear two beeps. •...

  • Page 58: Auto Redial

    Auto Redial Auto Redial Description Instead of redialing, have Auto Redial periodically retry a busy outside number. Auto Redial periodically redials a busy outside number. If a keyset user places an outside call and the call recipient is busy, the user can press a soft key to enable Auto Redial. The keyset user doesn’t have to retry the number, hoping it will go through.
  • Page 59 Auto Redial Programming Is the interval between Auto Redial callout attempts correctly set? If yes, leave 1602-06: Repeat Redial Timer (page 673) at its current setting. If no, change 1602-06: Repeat Redial Timer (page 673) to meet the site requirements. Is the system waiting an adequate time for busy tone when handling an Auto Redial? If yes, leave 1602-07: Repeat Redial Busy Timer (page 673) at its current setting.

  • Page 60: Automatic Handsfree

    Automatic Handsfree Automatic Handsfree Description Automatic Handsfree is a convenience for workers who don’t have a free hand to answer a call or use a feature. Automatic Handsfree allows a keyset user to place or answer a call Handsfree by just pressing a key — with- out lifting the handset or pressing SPEAKER first.
  • Page 61 Automatic Handsfree Other Related Features Features Central Office Calls, Placing (page 78) With Automatic Handsfree, an extension user can press a line key to place an outside call without first lifting the handset or pressing . Users without Automatic Handsfree can preselect a line SPEAKER key before lifting the handset or pressing SPEAKER...

  • Page 62: Automatic Ring Down

    Automatic Ring Down Automatic Ring Down Description Turn to Ringdown Extension (page 293). 32 ◆ Features DSX Software Manual...

  • Page 63: Automatic Slot Configuration

    Automatic Slot Configuration Automatic Slot Configuration Description The system automatically installs PCBs when you power up the system. Automatic Slot Configuration automatically sets up station and line PCBs when you initially power up the system. This simplifies installation because you don’t have to use system programming to activate station and line PCBs after you plug them in.

  • Page 64: Background Music

    Authors and Publishers (ASCAP) or other similar organizations, if radio, television broadcasts or music other than material not in the public domain are transmitted through the Music on Hold feature of telecom- munications systems. NEC Unified Solutions, Inc. hereby disclaims any liability arising out of the failure to obtain such a license.
  • Page 65 Background Music Other Related Features Features Do Not Disturb (page 143) DND does not affect the operation of Background Music. Headset Compatibility (page 198) Background Music plays in the headset when the extension is in the headset mode. Music on Hold (page 246) Background Music and Music on Hold share the same music source.

  • Page 66: Barge In (Intrusion)

    Barge In (Intrusion) Barge In (Intrusion) Description In an emergency, use Barge In to get through to a co-worker right away. Barge In permits an extension user to break into another extension user’s established call. This sets up a three-way conversation between the intruding extension and the two parties on the initial call. The user can Barge In on an Intercom call or outside call.
  • Page 67 Barge In (Intrusion) Operation In these instructions: Barge In (Intrusion) [Super Display Soft Key] [Super Display Soft Key] - [Keyset Soft Key] [Keyset Soft Key] To Barge In on a call: Place one of the following types of call: • Call busy extension.

  • Page 68: Battery Backup

    Battery Backup Battery Backup Description The system provides permanent backup of system memory. In the event of commercial AC power failure, the NAND Flash memory on the CPU PCB permanently main- tains the site database. Additionally, an internal battery on the CPU provides short-term backup of the sys- tem date and time (Real Time Clock) and certain station parameters (such as the Caller ID log).

  • Page 69: Brightness Control

    Brightness Control Brightness Control Description Turn to Volume, Brightness, and Contrast Controls (page 388). Features ◆ 39 DSX Software Manual...

  • Page 70: Call Coverage Keys

    Call Coverage Keys Call Coverage Keys Description Call Coverage keys allow an extension user to cover a co-worker’s calls from their own telephone. A keyset can have Call Coverage Keys for a co-worker’s extensions, Ring Group master numbers and UCD Group master numbers.
  • Page 71 Call Coverage Keys Programming Setting up Call Coverage keys on a keyset. In 2121-[01 to 24]: Feature Key Codes (page 758): - For an Immediate Ring Call Coverage key, assign key code 06. - For a No Ring (Lamp Only) Call Coverage key, assign key code 07. - For a Delay Ring Call Coverage key, assign key code 08.
  • Page 72 Call Coverage Keys Other Related Features Features Direct Station Selection (DSS) Console (page 120) DSS Consoles can have Call Coverage keys. Distinctive Ringing (page 135) By using Key Ring Override, Distinctive Ringing allows an extension user to set up unique ringing for their Call Coverage keys.

  • Page 73: User Programmable Feature

    Call Coverage Keys Operation In these instructions: Answering Call Coverage Keys [Super Display Soft Key] [Super Display Soft Key] - [Keyset Soft Key] [Keyset Soft Key] To answer a call ringing or flashing a Call Coverage key: Press the flashing Call Coverage key. In these instructions: Using Call Coverage Keys to Place Calls [Super Display Soft Key]...

  • Page 74: Call Forwarding

    Call Forwarding Call Forwarding Description Call Forwarding ensures that the user’s calls are covered when they are away from their work area. Call Forwarding permits an extension user to redirect their call to another extension. The types of Call For- warding are: Call Forwarding when Not Answered ❥...

  • Page 75: Call Forwarding Toggle In A Personal Speed Dial Bin

    Call Forwarding Call Forwarding Toggle in a Personal Speed Dial Bin If an extension doesn’t have an available Feature Key for a Call Forwarding key, the user can program a Per- sonal Speed Dial bin for similar operation (without the BLF). To do this: While on hook, dial ❥...

  • Page 76: Call Forwarding Timers

    Call Forwarding Call Forwarding Timers The following diagrams show how the system implements various timers when handling forwarded calls. Refer to the programming for each individual timer for more information. Transferred Outside Call to Forwarded Extension Extension A transfers line to extension B, which is forwarded Busy/No Answer (type 2) to exten- sion C.
  • Page 77 Call Forwarding DIL (with overflow) to Forwarded Extension DIL (with overflow) rings programmed destina- tion, which is forwarded Busy/No Answer (type 2) to a co-worker. DIL rings programmed DIL destination for the 1601-02: DIL No Answer Timer DIL No Answer time. (page 669) 1601-02: DIL No Answer Timer If unanswered, the call rings the extension to which...
  • Page 78 Call Forwarding Programming Should an extension be able to use Call Forwarding? In 2102-01: Class of Service (page 724), check the extension’s Class of Service level. If yes, in 1406-02: Internal Call Forwarding (page 643) enter Yes . If no, in 1406-02: Internal Call Forwarding (page 643) enter No . If an extension has Ring No Answer forwarding enabled, do calls route to the forwarding destination after the correct interval? In yes, leave 1601-03: Call Forward No Answer Timer (page 670) at its current setting.
  • Page 79 Call Forwarding Group Ring (page 189) Call Forwarding will not reroute Group Ring calls. Intercom (page 211) Call Forwarding when Busy and Call Forwarding when Busy/Not Answered will not reroute voice- announced Intercom calls. It will reroute only ringing Intercom calls. Key Ring (page 214) Call Forwarding will not reroute Key Ring calls.

  • Page 80: User Programmable Feature

    Call Forwarding Operation In these instructions: Activating or Canceling Call Forwarding [Super Display Soft Key] [Keyset Soft Key] To activate Call Forwarding: Select the Call Forwarding options. [Menu + Call Forward] Alternately do one of the following: [Menu + Cfwd] •...

  • Page 81: Call Forwarding Off Premises

    Call Forwarding Off Premises Call Forwarding Off Premises Description When a user is out of the office, they can send their calls to their home office or cell phone. Off Premises Call Forwarding allows a keyset user to forward their calls to an off-site location (such as a cell phone or remote office) if allowed by their Class of Service.
  • Page 82 Call Forwarding Off Premises • An extension Speed Dial number stored in bin 719 should not be longer than 16 digits. If it is, the sys- tem automatically clears bin 719 when it stores an Off Premises Call Forwarding number in bin 720. •...
  • Page 83 Call Forwarding Off Premises Other Related Features Features Call Forwarding (page 44) Call Forwarding permits an extension user to redirect their call to another extension. Single Line Telephones (page 305) Call Forwarding Off Premises is not available at single line telephones. IntraMail Features None Operation...
  • Page 84 Call Forwarding Off Premises In these instructions: Activating or Canceling Call Forwarding Off Premises [Super Display Soft Key] [Keyset Soft Key] To view the currently enabled Off Premises Call Forwarding number (if any): [VIEW] Select to view the currently stored number. [View] •...

  • Page 85: Call Timer

    Call Timer Call Timer Description Call Timer helps users that must keep track of their time on the phone. Call Timer lets a keyset user with a Call Timer key time their outside calls on the telephone display. There are two types of Call Timer keys: Manual Call Timer ❥...
  • Page 86 Call Timer Other Related Features Features Caller ID (page 63) The Auto Timer feature interacts with Caller ID on the first line of the telephone display. Central Office Calls, Placing (page 78) Call Timer shows the time a user has been on an outside call. Flash (page 177) Flash restarts the Call Timer.
  • Page 87 Call Timer In these instructions: Stopping and Restarting the Call Timer for Your Call [Super Display Soft Key] [Keyset Soft Key] To stop the Call Timer: Do one of the following. [Timer] Press the Call Timer soft key. [Time] Press the Manual or Automatic Call Timer key. The Call Timer disappears from the display.

  • Page 88: Call Waiting / Camp-On

    Call Waiting / Camp-On Call Waiting / Camp-On Description Call Waiting helps busy extension users know when they have additional waiting calls. It also lets callers wait in line for a busy extension without being forgotten. With Call Waiting, an extension user may call a busy extension and wait in line (Camp-On) without hanging up.
  • Page 89 Call Waiting / Camp-On Programming Should an extension be able to send Camp-On tones to a busy co-worker? In 2102-01: Class of Service (page 724), check the sending extension’s Class of Service level. If yes, in 1402-03: Camp-On to Busy Extension (page 633), enter for the initiating extension.
  • Page 90 Call Waiting / Camp-On Other Related Features Features Attendant Position (page 24) An extension user cannot Camp-On to the attendant because the attendant’s extension is never busy. Callback (page 61) If an extension user Camps-On and then hangs up, the system converts the Camp-On to a Callback. Caller ID (page 63) An extension programmed to receive Camp-On tones or Off-Hook Ringing from a waiting call will also receive Second Call Caller ID.

  • Page 91: Callback

    Callback Callback Description With Callback, a user does not have to repeatedly call a busy extension back, hoping to find it idle. When an extension user calls a busy co-worker, they can leave a Callback request for a return call. The sys- tem services Callback requests as follows: Caller at extension A leaves a Callback at extension B.
  • Page 92 Callback Other Related Features Features Attendant Position (page 24) An extension user cannot leave a Callback for the attendant because the attendant’s extension is never busy. Call Waiting / Camp-On (page 58) If an extension user starts to leave a Callback request but doesn’t hang up, the system Camps-On instead.

  • Page 93: Caller Id

    Caller ID Caller ID Description Caller ID automatically displays the phone number and optional name for incoming outside calls. Caller ID allows a display keyset to show an incoming caller’s telephone number (called Directory Number or DN) and optional name as the call is ringing. Caller ID supports the telco’s Called Number Identification (CNI) and Called Number Delivery (CND) service, when available.

  • Page 94: Third Party Caller Id Check

    Caller ID Third Party Caller ID Check Third Party Caller ID Check allows an idle or busy keyset user to display the Caller ID data for another line. The line that the user checks can be ringing or busy. Caller ID Display Separator An extension’s display can optionally show a calling party number separator.
  • Page 95 Caller ID Programming Should the outside line provide Caller ID (if Caller ID service is also provided by the telco)? If yes: - In 3121-01: Caller ID Type (page 825) enter the type of Caller ID required (DSP = , ATRU-DB = T1/E1 ANI = - For ANI Caller ID, in 3121-02: ANI/DNIS Format (page 825) and 3121-04: Number of ANI Digits (page 826), set for compatibility with the connected service.
  • Page 96 Caller ID Other Related Features Features Call Timer (page 55) The Auto Timer feature interacts with Caller ID on the first line of the telephone display. If an exten- sion has Call Timer enabled, the first line (i.e., caller’s name) of the Second Call Caller ID display won’t show.
  • Page 97 Caller ID Operation In these instructions: Clearing the Display [Super Display Soft Key] [Keyset Soft Key] To cancel (clear) the Caller ID display and return your phone to its normal display: • You can only do this while you are on a call, not while your phone is ringing. Press CLEAR To turn the Caller ID display back on (after you press CLEAR to cancel it):...

  • Page 98: Caller Id Logging

    Caller ID Logging Caller ID Logging Description An extension can store the caller’s name and phone number for easy review and redialing. When caller ID is enabled, Caller ID Logging stores a record of the caller’s number and name (if provided by the telco) for each outside call that rings an extension.

  • Page 99: Types Of Calls That Are Logged

    Caller ID Logging Types of Calls that are Logged Call ID Logging will make a record of any outside call to an extension that can normally be answered using Ringing Line Preference. These include: Line key (Key Ring) and Loop Key calls ❥...
  • Page 100 Caller ID Logging Programming Setting Up Caller ID Callbacks Make sure Caller ID is installed. If Caller ID is not installed, turn to Caller ID (page 63) and set up your system’s Caller ID. Assign the outgoing route the system will use for Caller ID callbacks. In 3711-01: Caller ID Callback Route Type (page 856), select the type of route used for Caller ID call- backs ( 1 = line, 2 = Line Group).
  • Page 101 Caller ID Logging - In 3712-03: Home Area Code Exception List Type (page 859), specify the Home Area Code Excep- tion List Table as a Toll Table ( ) or a Local Table ( - If it is a Toll Table, the codes you enter in the table are toll calls. All other codes are local calls. - If it is a Local Table, the codes you enter in the table are local calls.
  • Page 102 Caller ID Logging Programming Examples Enable Caller ID callbacks (return calls) for a system in area code 203. • There is no 10-digit local calling or other special requirement. In 3121-01: Caller ID Type (page 825) for each line enter the type of Caller ID required: - (DSP = 1 , ATRU-DB = 2, T1/E1 ANI = 3 ).
  • Page 103 Caller ID Logging Operation In these instructions: Reviewing the Caller ID Log [Super Display Soft Key] [Keyset Soft Key] To review your Caller ID log: [Calls XX] Select the Caller ID log. [CLXX] • Your Ring/Message Lamp will wink on (green) when you have Caller ID records that you have not yet reviewed.

  • Page 104: Central Office Calls, Answering

    Central Office Calls, Answering Central Office Calls, Answering Description The system allows outside calls to ring and be answered at any combination of system extensions. The system provides flexible routing of incoming CO calls to meet the exact site requirements. Answering Priority When multiple calls ring an extension simultaneously, the system services the ringing calls in the follow- ing order:...
  • Page 105 Central Office Calls, Answering Programming Basic Programming Make sure each line’s circuit type and loop length setting match the requirements of the connected service. In 3101-01: Line Type (page 809), set the circuit type to match the connected service. In 3101-03: DTMF Dialing (page 811), indicate whether the line is DTMF ( ) or Dial Pulse ( In 3103-03: Loop Length (page 815) for analog lines only, set this option to compensate for the telco cir- cuits loop length.
  • Page 106 Central Office Calls, Answering Setting Up Line and Loop Keys Set up line and loop keys for an extension. For line keys: - In 2121-[01 to 24]: Feature Key Codes (page 758), enter 03 . - In 2121-[01 to 24]: Feature Key Data (page 758), enter the line number ( 1-64 ). - If an extension doesn’t have any line keys, you should assign Fixed or Switched Loop keys to make handling outside calls easier.

  • Page 107: User Programmable Feature

    Central Office Calls, Answering Other Related Features Features Call Timer (page 55) The Call Timer helps a user keep track of the time they spend on the phone. Direct Inward Line (page 109) A DIL rings an extension directly. Line Keys (page 227) Line keys simplify answering outside calls.

  • Page 108: Central Office Calls, Placing

    Central Office Calls, Placing Central Office Calls, Placing Description Customize the call placing options to meet the site requirements and each individual’s needs. The system provides flexibility in the way each extension user can place outgoing calls. A user can place a call by: Pressing a Line Key ❥...
  • Page 109 Central Office Calls, Placing Default Setting • Lines 1-12 ring on line keys 1-12 for extensions 300-315. All other extensions are lamp only for lines 1-12. Lines 13-64 do not appear on line keys. • All extensions have full access on all lines. •...
  • Page 110 Central Office Calls, Placing Programming Basic Programming Make sure each line’s circuit type and loop length setting match the requirements of the connected service. In 3101-01: Line Type (page 809), set the circuit type to match the connected service. In 3101-03: DTMF Dialing (page 811), indicate whether the line is DTMF ( 1 ) or Dial Pulse ( 0 ). In 3103-03: Loop Length (page 815) for analog lines only, set this option to compensate for the telco cir- cuits loop length.

  • Page 111: Access Code Options

    Central Office Calls, Placing Access Code Options Should extension have single digit (dial 9) or 2-digit (90-98) access to outside Line Groups? For single digit access: - In 1301-[01-10]: Function Type (page 620), check to be sure the digit 9 is type (Line Group).

  • Page 112: Setting Up Store And Forward

    Central Office Calls, Placing Setting Up Transmit and Receive Gain While on an outside call, is a user’s conversation transmitted to the caller at a comfortable level? If yes, leave 3103-01: Transmit Gain (page 814) for the line at it’s current value. If no, in 3103-01: Transmit Gain (page 814) adjust the line’s transmit gain as required.
  • Page 113 Central Office Calls, Placing Other Related Features Features Account Codes (page 14) You can use Store and Forward with Forced Account Codes. Automatic Handsfree (page 30) With Automatic Handsfree, an extension user can press a line key to place an outside call without first lifting the handset or pressing SPEAKER .
  • Page 114 Central Office Calls, Placing Operation In these instructions: Placing Outside Calls Using Line Keys [Super Display Soft Key] [Keyset Soft Key] To place an outside call over a specific line using a line key: Lift handset. Press line key. • You hear dial tone on the line you select and the line key lights green. •...
  • Page 115 Central Office Calls, Placing Using Store and Forward In these instructions: Feature Name [Super Display Soft Key] [Keyset Soft Key] To place an outside call using Store and Forward: Do one of the following. Press INTERCOM and dial • You may optionally be able to dial Press a Switched Loop key + Dial Line Group number ( 90-98 Press Fixed Loop key.

  • Page 116: Check Key

    Check Key Check Key Description Quickly check keyset and DSS Console Feature Key assignments. A keyset user can use the CHECK key to check keyset and DSS Console Feature Key assignments and Per- sonal Speed Dial bin names. Conditions • None Default Setting •...
  • Page 117 Check Key In these instructions: Checking Personal Speed Dial Bin Name and Number [Super Display Soft Key] (22-Button and 34-Button 3-Line Keysets Only) [Keyset Soft Key] Press the Personal Speed Dial bin key once to display the name for the lower numbered bin. •...

  • Page 118: Class Of Service

    Class of Service Class of Service Description Customize features and options for extensions and outside lines. Class of Service (COS) sets various features and options for extensions and outside lines. The system allows any number of extensions and lines to share the same Class of Service. The Class of Service options are pro- vided by the following programs: 140x-Station Options ❥...

  • Page 119: Conference

    Conference Conference Description A user can set up a multiple-party telephone meeting without leaving the office. Conference lets an extension user add additional inside and outside callers to their conversation. The follow- ing table shows the system’s Conference capacities: Description Capacity Conference circuits Maximum simultaneous users in Conference...
  • Page 120 Conference Operation In these instructions: Setting up a Conference [Super Display Soft Key] [Keyset Soft Key] To set up a Conference: Establish an Intercom or outside call. Press CONF . • Your hear Intercom dial tone. • Your caller hears Music on Hold (if installed) while they wait for you to set up the Conference. Do one of the following: Dial extension you want to add.

  • Page 121: Conference, Meet-Me

    Conference, Meet-Me Conference, Meet-Me Description Turn to Meet-Me Conference (page 236). Features ◆ 91 DSX Software Manual...

  • Page 122: Conference, Unsupervised

    Conference, Unsupervised Conference, Unsupervised Description Turn to Tandem Calls / Unsupervised Conference (page 341). 92 ◆ Features DSX Software Manual...

  • Page 123: Contrast Controls

    Contrast Controls Contrast Controls Description Turn to Volume, Brightness, and Contrast Controls (page 388). Features ◆ 93 DSX Software Manual...

  • Page 124: Cordless Telephone

    Cordless Telephone Cordless Telephone Description Provides cordless mobility and a rich feature set for employees away from their desks. The DSX Cordless Lite II Telephone (P/N 730087) is a 900 Mhz digital narrow band FM cord- less telephone that provides mobility, flexibility and convenience for those who spend much of the workday away from their desk.

  • Page 125: Delayed Ringing

    Delayed Ringing Delayed Ringing Description Delayed Ringing helps co-workers cover each other’s unanswered calls. Delayed Ringing allows a line to start ringing a preset interval after the call starts flashing a line key. This is helpful for co-workers that cover each other’s calls. For example, a secretary can have Delayed Ringing for the lines that ring the boss’s telephone.

  • Page 126: Dial Number Preview

    Dial Number Preview Dial Number Preview Description Dial Number Preview helps the user avoid dialing errors. Dial Number Preview lets a display keyset user dial and review a number before the system dials it out. Conditions • None. Default Setting •...
  • Page 127 Dial Number Preview In these instructions: Editing the Displayed Number [Super Display Soft Key] [Keyset Soft Key] Press a line key to have the system automatically dial the displayed number. In these instructions: Dial Number Preview Editing Example [Super Display Soft Key] [Keyset Soft Key] To replace 2049265410 with 2039265400: Dial...

  • Page 128: Dial Tone Detection

    Dial Tone Detection Dial Tone Detection Description You can set up the system to detect CO dial tone. The system can optionally detect precise CO dial tone for automatically dialed outside calls (such as Speed Dial and Auto Redial calls). With Dial Tone Detection enabled for a line, the system will monitor the line when initially seized for valid dial tone or stutter dial tone.

  • Page 129: Direct Inward Dialing

    Direct Inward Dialing Direct Inward Dialing Description Directly dial system extensions from outside the system. Direct Inward Dialing (DID) lets outside callers directly dial system extensions. DID saves time for callers who know the extension number they wish to reach. To place a DID call, the outside caller dials the local exchange (NXX) and additional digits to ring the telephone system extension.

  • Page 130: Ani/Dnis Support

    Direct Inward Dialing - If the telco doesn’t send any digits into the system, or If the digits sent by the telco don’t correspond to a DID Translation Table entry, or If the destination extension is out of service: The call follows the 3112-Termination routing for the line. This includes the settings for Day Ter- mination, Day Overflow, Night Termination, and Night Overflow.

  • Page 131: Basic Did Call Handling

    Direct Inward Dialing DID Call Handling The following steps illustrate how the system handles DID calls when the call is not intercepted by an exten- sion’s Call Forwarding or Extension Hunting. Basic DID Call Handling Is telco sending incorrect digits, or is there a DID Translation Table programming error? If yes: Vacant Intercept The call normally follows the following Line Overflow programming.

  • Page 132: How Call Forwarding And Extension Hunting Interact With Did Calls

    Direct Inward Dialing How Call Forwarding and Extension Hunting Interact with DID Calls The following chart summarizes how the system handles unanswered DID calls when Call Forwarding and/ or Extension Hunting are enabled at an extension. For the specific routing details, see: DID Call Handling with Call Forwarding and Extension Hunting (page 103).

  • Page 133: Did Call Handling With Call Forwarding And Extension Hunting

    Direct Inward Dialing DID Call Handling with Call Forwarding and Extension Hunting The following two tables show the detailed interaction between Call Forwarding and Extension Hunting for unanswered DID Calls. These interactions occur when an extension user enables Call Forwarding and their extension is already part of an Extension Hunting group.
  • Page 134 Direct Inward Dialing Call Forwarding and Type 1 (Ring No Answer Line) Extension Hunting Destination Extension Forwarding Type Ring No Answer Busy In DND No Answer • DID call rings destination. • DID call rings the hunt destination. • If unanswered, it rings the •...

  • Page 135: Did Station Intercept And Line Overflow

    Direct Inward Dialing DID Station Intercept and Line Overflow The following table shows the detailed interaction between DID Station Intercept and Line Overflow for unan- swered DID Calls. These interactions occur when an extension has DID Station Intercept enabled, the DID line has Line Overflow enabled, and the call is not intercepted by either Call Forwarding or Extension Hunting.
  • Page 136 Direct Inward Dialing Programming Basic Programming Set the circuit type for each DID line. Be sure your T1 PCB is installed and connected and that your telco is providing T1 DID service. In 3101-01: Line Type (page 809), enter the correct circuit type for each DID line: - 03 for DID Wink Start - 04 for DID Immediate Start In 3101-03: DTMF Dialing (page 811), indicate whether the line is DTMF ( 1 ) or Dial Pulse ( 0 ).

  • Page 137: Did Overflow, Camp-On, And Intercept Options

    Direct Inward Dialing - In 3121-04: Number of ANI Digits (page 826), specify the number of digits the telco provides in the ANI number (for option 1 above only). This program does not apply to options 2-4 above. If no, in 3121-01: Caller ID Type (page 825) do not enter to enable ANI-based Caller ID for the line.
  • Page 138 Direct Inward Dialing Does an unanswered extension ring the correct amount of time before DID Station Intercept or Line Overflow occurs? If yes, leave 1601-02: DIL No Answer Timer (page 669) at its current value. If no, adjust 1601-02: DIL No Answer Timer (page 669) as required. Should DID calls be allowed to Camp-On to an extension? In 2102-01: Class of Service (page 724), check the extension’s Class of Service level.

  • Page 139: Direct Inward Line

    Direct Inward Line Direct Inward Line Description A DIL lets an employee know which calls are just for them. A Direct Inward Line (DIL) is a line that rings an extension directly. Since DILs only ring one extension, employees always know which calls are for them. For example, a company operator can have a Direct Inward Line for International Sales Information.
  • Page 140 Direct Inward Line Programming Basic Programming Check the DIL’s circuit type. In 3101-01: Line Type (page 809), check to be sure the line’s circuit type matches the connected service. In 3101-03: DTMF Dialing (page 811), indicate whether the line is DTMF ( 1 ) or Dial Pulse ( 0 ). Assign the DIL day and night mode terminations (answering points).
  • Page 141 Direct Inward Line DIL Overflow Should an unanswered DIL overflow during the day? If yes: - In 3112-02: Enable Day Overflow (page 819) enter - In 3112-03: Day Overflow Destination (page 820) enter the day overflow destination. The destina- tion can be: - An extension - A UCD Group master number - The voice mail master number...
  • Page 142 Direct Inward Line Setting Up Line and Loop Keys Set up line or loop key for the DIL. For line keys: - In 2121-[01 to 24]: Feature Key Codes (page 758), enter 03 . - In 2121-[01 to 24]: Feature Key Data (page 758), enter the DIL line number ( 1-64 ). - If an extension doesn’t have any line keys, you should assign Fixed or Switched Loop keys to make handling outside calls easier.
  • Page 143 Direct Inward Line Other Related Features Features Call Forwarding (page 44) Call Forwarding will reroute an extension’s DILs. Call Waiting / Camp-On (page 58) A DIL to a busy extension will send Camp-On tones (if the extension is programmed to normally receive Camp-On tones).
  • Page 144 Direct Inward Line Operation In these instructions: Handling Your Direct Inward Lines [Super Display Soft Key] [Keyset Soft Key] To answer a call on your Direct Inward Line: The line or loop key for your DIL flashes green. Lift handset. •...

  • Page 145: Direct Line Access

    Direct Line Access Direct Line Access Description Priority users can access lines directly. Direct Line Access also lets maintenance personnel access and test individual lines. Direct Line Access lets an extension user access (seize) an individual line. After seizing the line, the user can dial any outside telephone number without restriction.
  • Page 146 Direct Line Access Operation In these instructions: Using Direct Line Access [Super Display Soft Key] [Keyset Soft Key] To place a call over a specific line using Direct Line Access: Lift the handset. Press INTERCOM . Dial 1 plus the line number (e.g., 01 for line 1). •...

  • Page 147: Direct Station Selection (Dss)

    Direct Station Selection (DSS) Direct Station Selection (DSS) Description Quickly place and Transfer calls to co-workers, without having to look up or dial your co- worker’s extension numbers. Important • If you enable an extension’s DSS Keys and leave the extension’s default Prime Line programming intact, the line keys automatically change to DSS keys when the user lifts the handset.
  • Page 148 Direct Station Selection (DSS) Programming Should extension have DSS capability on their Feature Keys? If yes: - In 2111-03: Enable DSS/BLF Keys (page 731), enter Yes . - In 2114-01: Prime Line Key (page 741), do not enable Intercom Prime Line. This prevents the extension’s line keys from switching to DSS mode when the user lifts the handset while idle.

  • Page 149: User Programmable Feature

    Direct Station Selection (DSS) Operation In these instructions: Placing a Call using a DSS Key [Super Display Soft Key] [Keyset Soft Key] To place a call to a co-worker using a DSS key: Lift the handset. Press INTERCOM • Your DSS keys show the status of the assigned extension: Off = Idle On = Busy or ringing Fast flash = in Do Not Disturb...

  • Page 150: Direct Station Selection (Dss) Console

    Direct Station Selection (DSS) Console Direct Station Selection (DSS) Console Description DSS Consoles provide one-touch access to extensions, lines, and system features. The DSS Console (P/N 1090024 for black and P/N 090029 for white) gives a keyset user one-button access to exten- sions, lines, and selected features.

  • Page 151: Default Dss Console Key Assignments

    Direct Station Selection (DSS) Console Default DSS Console Key Assignments The following illustration shows the default DSS Console key assignments. Page 1 Page 2 Page 3 Park 60 Park 61 CALL Park 62 Park 63 Park 64 Park 65 Park 66 Night ANSWER RELEASE...
  • Page 152 Direct Station Selection (DSS) Console Programming Set up the DSS Console. In 1202-01: Primary Station Port Assignment (page 612), assign each DSS Console hardware (physical) port to a software port. - 301 for DSS Console 1 - 302 for DSS Console 2 - 303 for DSS Console 3 - 304 for DSS Console 4 - Note that the first DSS Console installed auto-IDs as software port 301.

  • Page 153: Dss Console Feature Key Assignments

    Direct Station Selection (DSS) Console DSS Console Feature Key Assignments (Page 1 of 4) DSS Console Feature Key Assignments Key Type Description Key Code and Data Operation Use this option to designate a Feature Key as Undefined undefined (no function). Use this option to assign a Feature Key as a 3 + nn (line •...
  • Page 154 Direct Station Selection (DSS) Console (Page 2 of 4) DSS Console Feature Key Assignments Key Type Description Key Code and Data Operation Use this option to assign a Feature Key as a 7 + nnn (extension • Press key to call cov- Call Coverage No number) lamp only (no ring) Call Coverage Key.
  • Page 155 Direct Station Selection (DSS) Console (Page 3 of 4) DSS Console Feature Key Assignments Key Type Description Key Code and Data Operation Use this option to assign a Feature Key as a 14 + nnn (bin 001- • Press key to dial System Speed 999) Dial...
  • Page 156 Direct Station Selection (DSS) Console (Page 4 of 4) DSS Console Feature Key Assignments Key Type Description Key Code and Data Operation Use this option to assign a Feature Key as a While on a call: Save Number Save Number Dialed key. •...
  • Page 157 Direct Station Selection (DSS) Console Other Related Features Features Account Codes (page 14) A DSS Console can have an Account Code key to simplify Account Code entry. Call Coverage Keys (page 40) A DSS Console can have Call Coverage keys. Call Forwarding (page 44) A DSS Console Call Forwarding key can streamline Call Forwarding operation.

  • Page 158: User Programmable Feature

    Direct Station Selection (DSS) Console Operation See DSS Console Feature Key Assignments (page 123). In these instructions: Using the Speed Processing Keys on the DSS Console [Super Display Soft Key] [Keyset Soft Key] To use the ANSWER key: Press ANSWER to answer any call ringing your extension. To use the RELEASE key: Press RELEASE to hang up (disconnect) your active call.

  • Page 159: Directed Call Pickup

    Directed Call Pickup Directed Call Pickup Description Directed Call Pickup allows co-workers to answer each other’s calls. Directed Call Pickup permits an extension user to intercept any type of call ringing another extension. With Directed Call Pickup, an extension user can pick up: Outside (Key Ring) calls ringing an extension ❥...
  • Page 160 Directed Call Pickup Operation In these instructions: Using Directed Call Pickup [Super Display Soft Key] [Keyset Soft Key] To intercept a call ringing a co-worker’s extension: Lift the handset. Dial * * . Dial the number of the extension whose call you want to intercept. •...

  • Page 161: Directory Dialing

    Directory Dialing Directory Dialing Description Allows users to place Intercom or Speed Dial calls from a displayed list of names. Directory Dialing allows a display keyset user to select a co-worker or outside call from a list of names, rather than dialing the phone number. There are three types of directory Dialing: System ( ompany-Wide) Speed Dial names.
  • Page 162 Directory Dialing Do extension users have adequate time to enter their Directory Dialing options? If yes, leave 1602-01: Interdigit Timer (page 671) at its current value. If no, adjust 1602-01: Interdigit Timer (page 671) as required. Other Related Features Features Direct Station Selection (DSS) Console (page 120) Assign a Directory Dialing key on a DSS Console.
  • Page 163 Directory Dialing In these instructions: Using Directory Dialing [Super Display Soft Key] [Keyset Soft Key] Look at your telephone’s display and dial the digit for the letter you want to call. • In the example in step i: - Dial if the name begins with G.

  • Page 164: Display, Alphanumeric

    Display, Alphanumeric Display, Alphanumeric Description Turn to Alphanumeric Display (page 21). 134 ◆ Features DSX Software Manual...

  • Page 165: Distinctive Ringing

    Distinctive Ringing Distinctive Ringing Description Allows users to customize their telephone’s ringing so they’ll know when calls are just for them. Important Use 9014-01: Initialize Ring Tones (page 920) to initialize Distinctive Ringing with a single command. Following initialization, you must reset the system or unplug and then re-plug each telephone. Distinctive Ringing allows the installer or keyset extension user to customize keyset ringing.

  • Page 166: Understanding Ring Types

    Distinctive Ringing Understanding Ring Types The Ring Types determine how different types of calls rings extensions. Each Ring Type sounds unique because it uses one of the 10 available ring tones. The first four Ring Types are assigned by default (see the table below).
  • Page 167 Distinctive Ringing Conditions • None Default Setting • Outside lines, Ring Groups, and UCD Groups use Type A ringing. • The soft keys are disabled. ASSIGN (ASGN) • The soft keys is enabled. CONFIG (CNFG) Programming Setting up Distinctive Ring Configuration. Enable the ) soft keys.
  • Page 168 Distinctive Ringing Setting Up Extension Ring Override. Enable the soft keys. RING - In 2102-01: Class of Service (page 724), check the extension’s Class of Service level. - In 1405-02: Station Ring Override (page 641), enter Yes . System Programming To set up Extension Ring Override: - In 2103-01: Day Ring Type (page 726), enter the day ring type ( 1 =Type A, 2 =Type B, 3 =Type C).
  • Page 169 Distinctive Ringing Initialize Distinctive Ringing (i.e., return to default). System Programming To initialize Distinctive Ringing system-wide (i.e., return to factory default): - Use 9014-01: Initialize Ring Tones (page 920) from system programming. - This option is not available using an extension’s soft keys. Other Related Features Features Call Coverage Keys (page 40)
  • Page 170 Distinctive Ringing Operation Distinctive Ring Configuration In these instructions: Using Distinctive Ring Configuration [Super Display Soft Key] [Keyset Soft Key] To customize a Ring Set for your extension: [Menu + Ring Select the Distinctive Ringing options. [Menu + MORE + Ring] [Config] Select Distinctive Ring Configuration.
  • Page 171 Distinctive Ringing Extension Override In these instructions: Using Extension Override [Super Display Soft Key] [Keyset Soft Key] To customize ringing for your extension’s outside calls: [Menu + Ring] Select the Distinctive Ringing options. [Menu + MORE + Ring] [Assign] Select Extension Override. [Asgn] Select the ringing mode you want to change.
  • Page 172 Distinctive Ringing Key Ring Override In these instructions: Using Key Ring Override [Super Display Soft Key] [Keyset Soft Key] To assign a Ring Type to a Call Coverage, Group Call Pickup, or line key: [Menu + Ring] Select the Distinctive Ringing options. [Menu + MORE + Ring] [Key] Select Key Ring Override.

  • Page 173: Do Not Disturb

    Do Not Disturb Do Not Disturb Description DND permits an extension user to work by the phone undisturbed by incoming calls and announcements. Do Not Disturb (DND) blocks incoming calls, Off-Hook Signaling and Paging announcements. An exten- sion user can activate DND anytime while on a call or while their phone is idle. Once activated, incoming outside calls still flash the line keys.
  • Page 174 Do Not Disturb Call Coverage Key Busy Lamp Indications When the key is: The covered extension is: Idle or not installed Busy Slow flash Ringing Medium flash In DND for outside calls (option 1) Fast Flash In DND for Intercom calls (option 2) or All Calls (option 3) Note: When transferring an outside call to an extension in DND, the Transfer will be blocked if the extension has enabled DND for all calls (type 3) or DND for outside calls (type 1).
  • Page 175 Do Not Disturb Message Waiting (page 238) An extension user can leave a Message Waiting at an extension in Do Not Disturb. Night Service / Night Ring (page 252) A DIL destination activates the night mode for the DIL when they press DND. Paging (page 259) DND blocks Paging announcements.

  • Page 176: Do Not Disturb Override

    Do Not Disturb Override Do Not Disturb Override Description Easily override a co-worker’s Do Not Disturb. Do Not Disturb Override lets an extension user override another extension’s Do Not Disturb. This allows a priority employee (such as a supervisor or executive) to get through to a co-worker right away while the co- worker’s phone is in Do Not Disturb.

  • Page 177: Door Box

    Door Box Door Box Description Use a Door Box to remotely monitor an entrance door. The Door Box (P/N 922450) is a self-contained analog Intercom unit typically used to monitor an entrance door. A visitor at the door can press the Door Box call button (like a door bell). The Door Box then sends chime tones or ringing to all extensions programmed to receive chimes.
  • Page 178 Door Box Conditions • Door Box P/N 922450 is a weather-tight unit, and can be mounted outside. It has an operating temper- ature range of -20 to 60 degrees C (-4 to 140 degrees F) and a relative humidity of 10-95%, non-con- densing.
  • Page 179 Door Box 2PGDAD Module Door Box Setup Set up the 2PGDAD Module Door Box ports. Locate an available 16ESIU PCB digital station port (e.g., station port 10/extension 309). - If you wait to plug in the 2PGDAD Module until after your programming is complete, the second- ary station port set up in the next step will auto-ID as a Door Box.
  • Page 180 Door Box DSX-40 “Built-In” Door Box Setup Connect an Analog Door Box (P/N 922450) to a “built-in” Door Box port. Refer to the DSX-40 Hardware Manual for additional details. - DOOR 1 is extension 326. - DOOR 2 is extension 327. Optionally have a “built-in”...
  • Page 181 Door Box Transfer (page 358) An extension user cannot Transfer a call to a Door Box. IntraMail Features None Operation In these instructions: Calling from the Door Box [Super Display Soft Key] [Keyset Soft Key] To place a call from the Door Box: Press the Door Box call button.

  • Page 182: Equal Access Compatibility

    Equal Access Compatibility Equal Access Compatibility Description See Toll Restriction (page 351) for more. 152 ◆ Features DSX Software Manual...

  • Page 183: Extended Ringing

    Extended Ringing Extended Ringing Description Lets calls ring longer that usual to assist co-workers that can’t readily get to their phones. Extended Ringing forces an unanswered call to ring a telephone an extended number of times before rerout- ing. This helps a users that cannot get to their phone quickly to pick up calls (such as a warehouse worker). Extended Ringing is available with the following features: Direct Inward Line ❥...

  • Page 184: Extension Hunting

    Extension Hunting Extension Hunting Description Automatically route calls to co-workers that work closely together. Extension Hunting routes calls to a predefined group of hunt group member extensions. A call rings in sequence through the hunt group until answered at a member extension. Extension Hunting is helpful, for example, for a group of co-workers that share responsibility for answering calls.

  • Page 185: Terminal Hunting

    Extension Hunting Circular Hunting Notes: For type 3 hunting, an Intercom call will stop hunting when it voice-announces. Extension Hunting fol- ❥ lows the Handsfree Answerback/Forced Intercom Ringing setup at each extension. Placing an extension in DND temporarily removes it from the Circular Hunting group. ❥...
  • Page 186 Extension Hunting Calls to the “dummy” extension activate the Call Coverage keys on the covering extensions. ❥ Co-workers can transfer calls into the group. They will ring all Call Coverage keys for the group. If unan- ❥ swered, a call transferred into the group follows the programmed UCD Group overflow destination (as do unanswered calls).
  • Page 187 Extension Hunting Programming Setting Up Circular Hunting Assign the hunt type to each extension in a Circular Hunting Group? In 2115-01: Hunt Type (page 746), assign the hunt type for each extension in the group. = Ring No Answer Outside Calls = Busy/Ring No Answer Outside Calls = Busy/Ring No Answer All Calls = Busy Outside Calls...
  • Page 188 Extension Hunting Do calls ring a hunt group member for the correct interval before routing to the next extension? If yes: - Leave 1601-03: Call Forward No Answer Timer (page 670) and 1603-01: Transfer Recall Timer (page 675) at their current settings. If no: - To change how long the first member of the group rings, adjust 1603-01: Transfer Recall Timer (page 675) as required.
  • Page 189 Extension Hunting Setting Up UCD Hunting Assign hunt type 05 to each member of the UCD Group. In 2115-01: Hunt Type (page 746), make sure each extension in the UCD Group has hunt type 05. Make sure all group members have the same master extension number. In 2115-01: UCD Group Master Number (page 746), make sure each extension in the same UCD Group has the same master number.
  • Page 190 Extension Hunting Extension Hunting Timers The following diagrams show how the system implements various timers when handling Extension Hunt- ing calls. Transfer to Hunt Group Busy/Ring No Answer All Calls (Type 3) Circular and Terminal Hunting Call transferred into hunt group. 1603-01: Transfer Recall Timer Call rings first member for Transfer Recall time.
  • Page 191 Extension Hunting Transfer to Hunt Group Busy/Ring No Answer All Calls (Type 3) Circular and Terminal Hunting Routing to Busy UCD Group with Overflow Call transferred to extension A, which is the sin- gle member of a type 3 hunt group that is set up to hunt to extension B.
  • Page 192 Extension Hunting DIL (no overflow) to Hunt Group Busy/Ring No Answer All Calls (Type 3) Circular and Terminal Hunting DIL (with no overflow) directly rings hunt group member. 1601-02: DIL No Answer Timer DIL rings programmed DIL destination for the (page 669) DIL No Answer time.
  • Page 193 Extension Hunting Outside Call on Hold at Hunt Group Member Busy/Ring No Answer All Calls (Type 3) Circular and Terminal Hunting Hunt group member puts outside call on Hold. 1603-02: Hold Recall Timer If not picked up, outside call recalls the extension (page 675) that put it on Hold after the Hold Recall time.
  • Page 194 Extension Hunting Night Service / Night Ring (page 252) To put DILs to a UCD Group master number into the night mode, press a uniquely programmed UCD Master Night key. Transfer (page 358) • Outside calls transferred to a Terminal or Circular Hunting group member activate hunting. In addi- tion, outside calls transferred to a UCD Group master number activate hunting.
  • Page 195 Extension Hunting Operation In these instructions: Sending a Call to a Terminal or Circular Hunting Group [Super Display Soft Key] [Keyset Soft Key] To send a call to a Terminal or Circular Hunting Group: Do one of the following. Transfer an outside call to a hunt group member. Set up a DIL to a hunt group member.

  • Page 196: Extension Locking

    Extension Locking Extension Locking Description When they leave the office, a keyset user can secure their phone to prevent unauthorized use. Extension Locking allows a keyset extension user to secure their phone when they leave the office. The user may want to do this if their phone has Toll Restriction and Class of Service options enabled that could be easily abused.
  • Page 197 Extension Locking Operation In these instructions: Locking and Unlocking Your Extension [Super Display Soft Key] [Keyset Soft Key] To lock your extension: Press INTERCOM and dial • While your extension is locked, winks on and you hear pulsating dial tone when you press INTERCOM To unlock your extension: Press...
  • Page 198 Extension Locking In these instructions: Unlocking an Extension from the Attendant’s Phone [Super Display Soft Key] [Keyset Soft Key] To unlock an extension (and clear the extension’s PIN number) from the attendant’s phone: Press INTERCOM and dial ##3 . • You must have a PIN number entered for your phone to use this feature. When you see ENTER PIN CODE •...

  • Page 199: Feature Keys

    Feature Keys Feature Keys Description Feature Keys simplify feature operation. Each keyset has Feature Keys. These Feature Keys simplify placing calls, answering calls and using certain features. You can customize the function of any keyset’s Feature Keys from the system program and the User Programmable Features.

  • Page 200: Extension Feature Key Assignments

    Feature Keys • Headset key • Night key • Split • Hotline • Page Zones • Voice Mail Conversation Record Conditions • If you unplug a 34-button telephone and replace it with a 22-button telephone, Feature Keys 13-24 are inaccessible. However, the system still retains the programming for those keys. Default Setting •...
  • Page 201 Feature Keys (Page 2 of 6) Extension Feature Key Assignments Key Type Description Key Code and Data Operation Use this option to assign a Feature Key as a 02 + nn (Line Group Loop Key (Fixed) 90-98) (page 233) Fixed Loop key. Busy Lamp Field (BLF) .
  • Page 202 Feature Keys (Page 3 of 6) Extension Feature Key Assignments Key Type Description Key Code and Data Operation Use this option to assign a Feature Key as a 07 + nnn (extension • Press key to call cov- Call Coverage No number) lamp only (no ring) Call Coverage Key.
  • Page 203 Feature Keys (Page 4 of 6) Extension Feature Key Assignments Key Type Description Key Code and Data Operation Use this option to assign a Feature Key as a 14 + nnn (bin 001- • Press key to dial System Speed 999) Dial System Speed Dial key.
  • Page 204 Feature Keys (Page 5 of 6) Extension Feature Key Assignments Key Type Description Key Code and Data Operation Use this option to assign a Feature Key as a 23 + nnn (extension • While on a handset Reverse Voice number) Reverse Voice Over key.
  • Page 205 Feature Keys (Page 6 of 6) Extension Feature Key Assignments Key Type Description Key Code and Data Operation Use this option to assign a Feature Key as a • Press key to enable Headset (page 198) Headset key. or disable headset mode.

  • Page 206: User Programmable Feature

    Feature Keys Speed Dial (page 315) An extension can have keys for Personal and System Speed Dial bins. Voice Mail (page 372) An extension can have voice mail Record and Message Center keys. IntraMail Features None Operation See Extension Feature Key Assignments (page 170). User Programmable Feature Programming Feature Keys Feature...

  • Page 207: Flash

    Flash Flash Description Extension users can access certain CO and PBX features by interrupting line loop current. Flash allows an extension user to access certain CO and PBX features by interrupting line loop current. Flash lets an extension user take full advantage of whatever features the connected telco or PBX offers. You must set the Flash parameters for compatibility with the connected telco.
  • Page 208 Flash Other Related Features Features Call Timer (page 55) Flash restarts the Call Timer. PBX / Centrex Compatibility (page 270) Flash allows an extension user to access certain telco or PBX features. Toll Restriction (page 351) When an extension user with Toll Restriction enabled flashes a line, the system enforces toll Restric- tion on any digits the user dials from the new dial tone.

  • Page 209: Flexible Numbering Plan

    Flexible Numbering Plan Flexible Numbering Plan Description Change the digits users dial for co-workers and other features. The system’s Flexible Numbering Plan allows you to change the digits users dial to reach the attendant, other co-worker’s, outside lines, UCD Groups, and Ring Groups. The following chart shows the areas of the system number plan you can change.
  • Page 210 Flexible Numbering Plan Programming Do you want to change the digit(s) users dial to reach system operator(s)? In yes: - In 1301-[01-10]: Function Type (page 620), assign another digit (except 3) to type 1 (operator access). - In 1301-[01-10]: Expected Number of Digits (page 620), change the expected digits option for the new digit to 2 .
  • Page 211 Flexible Numbering Plan Do you want to change the Intercom extension number range? If yes: - In 1301-[01-10]: Function Type (page 620), assign another digit (except 3) to type (extension access). - In 1301-[01-10]: Expected Number of Digits (page 620), change the expected digits option for the new digit to - In 1311-01: Station Extension Number (page 623), change the extension numbers to use the leading digit selected above.

  • Page 212: Forced Line Disconnect

    Forced Line Disconnect Forced Line Disconnect Description Disconnect a co-worker’s outside call in an emergency. Forced Line Disconnect allows an extension user to disconnect (release) another extension’s active outside call. Forced Line Disconnect lets a user access a busy line in an emergency, when no other lines are avail- able.
  • Page 213 Forced Line Disconnect Operation In these instructions: Using Forced Line Disconnect [Super Display Soft Key] [Keyset Soft Key] To disconnect a busy line: Do one of the following. Press the line key for the busy line. Press INTERCOM and dial the line’s extension number (e.g., 101 for line 1). When you hear busy tone, dial to disconnect the line.

  • Page 214: Group Call Pickup

    Group Call Pickup Group Call Pickup Description Easily answer a call ringing your Pickup Group, even if you don’t know which extension is ringing. Group Call Pickup allows an extension user to answer a call ringing an extension in their assigned Pickup Group.
  • Page 215 Group Call Pickup Setting up Group Call Pickup keys on a keyset. In 2121-[01 to 24]: Feature Key Codes (page 758): - For an Immediate Ring Group Call Pickup key, assign key code 09. - For a No Ring (Lamp Only) Group Call Pickup key, assign key code 10. - For a Delay Ring Group Call Pickup key, assign key code 11.

  • Page 216: User Programmable Feature

    Group Call Pickup Operation In these instructions: Answering a Pickup Group Call [Super Display Soft Key] [Keyset Soft Key] To answer a call ringing a phone in your Pickup Group: Lift the handset. Do one of the following. Press the flashing Group Call Pickup key. Press INTERCOM and dial *# .

  • Page 217: Group Listen

    Group Listen Group Listen Description Use Group Listen to talk to an important client or customer and have your co-workers listen in on the meeting. Group Listen permits a keyset user to talk on the handset and have their caller’s voice broadcast over the telephone speaker.
  • Page 218 Group Listen Operation In these instructions: Using Group Listen [Super Display Soft Key] [Keyset Soft Key] To set up Group Listen: Place or answer a call using the handset. Press SPEAKER twice (but do not hang up). • SPEAKER flashes slowly red. Talk to the caller through your handset.

  • Page 219: Group Ring

    Group Ring Group Ring Description Use Group Ring to call a group of co-worker’s simultaneously. Group Ring allows you to arrange extensions into Ring Groups for answering calls. When a call comes into the Ring Group master number, all extensions in the group ring simultaneously. Any user in the Ring Group can answer the call just by lifting the handset.
  • Page 220 Group Ring Programming Basic Programming Should an extension be in a Ring Group? If yes, in 2113-02: Ring Group (page 738) enter the Ring Group ( 1 - 8 ) to which the extension belongs. If no, in 2113-02: Ring Group (page 738) enter 0 . Do you want to enter a name for a Ring Group? If yes, in 2201-01: Ring Group Name (page 779) enter the Ring Group name.
  • Page 221 Group Ring Setting Up Ring Group DILs Should a DIL route to a Ring Group during the day? If yes, in 3112-01: Direct Termination in the Day (page 819) enter the Ring Group master number. - Use a System Night key to switch a DIL to a Ring Group from day to night mode. If no, in 3112-01: Direct Termination in the Day (page 819) enter a day destination other than a Ring Group master number.
  • Page 222 Group Ring Adjusting Ring Group Timers If a Ring Group DIL is unanswered, does the call divert to its overflow destination after the proper interval? If yes, leave 1601-01: Line No Answer Timer (page 669) at its current setting. If no, change 1601-01: Line No Answer Timer (page 669) as required. If a DIL is unanswered at the overflow destination, does the call divert to Key Ring after the proper interval? If yes, leave 1601-02: DIL No Answer Timer (page 669) at it’s current setting.
  • Page 223 Group Ring Operation Placing and Transferring Ring Group Calls In these instructions: Placing an Intercom Call to a Ring Group [Super Display Soft Key] [Keyset Soft Key] To make an Intercom call to a Ring Group: Lift handset and press INTERCOM Dial the Ring Group number (e.g., 600).
  • Page 224 Group Ring Answering Ring Group Calls In these instructions: Answer a Call to a Ring Group [Super Display Soft Key] [Keyset Soft Key] To answer a call ringing your Ring Group: Do one of the following: If the call doesn’t appear on a line or loop key: Lift handset.

  • Page 225: Handsfree And Handsfree Answerback

    Handsfree and Handsfree Answerback Handsfree and Handsfree Answerback Description - Talk over the phone Handsfree, using the built-in speaker and microphone. - With Handsfree Answerback, answer an Intercom call by just speaking toward your phone. Handsfree Handsfree allows a keyset user to process calls using the speaker and microphone in the telephone (instead of the handset).
  • Page 226 Handsfree and Handsfree Answerback Other Related Features Features Automatic Handsfree (page 30) Automatic Handsfree allows a keyset user to place or answer a call Handsfree by just pressing a key — without pressing SPEAKER first. Headset Compatibility (page 198) Handsfree is not available to extensions in the headset mode. Handsfree Answerback is still available —...

  • Page 227: User Programmable Feature

    Handsfree and Handsfree Answerback In these instructions: Setting Up Incoming Voice Announcements [Super Display Soft Key] [Keyset Soft Key] To turn incoming voice announcements on: [On + EXIT] [On + EXIT] To turn incoming voice announcements off: [Off + EXIT] [Off + EXIT] User Programmable Feature Setting Up Incoming Voice Announcements...

  • Page 228: Headset Compatibility

    Headset Compatibility Headset Compatibility Description Have the privacy of a handset call without having to hold the handset. A keyset user can utilize a customer-provided headset in place of the handset. Like using Handsfree, using the headset frees up the user’s hands for other work. However, the headset provides privacy not available from Handsfree.

  • Page 229: Headset Key

    Headset Compatibility Headset Key A keyset user can have a Feature Key on their telephone or DSS Console assigned as a Headset key. The user presses the key to enable or disable the headset mode, as an alternative to using the User Pro- grammable Feature.
  • Page 230 Headset Compatibility Programming Optionally assign a Headset key to an extension or DSS Console Feature Key. To assign a Headset key to an extension Feature Key: - In 2121-[01 to 24]: Feature Key Codes (page 758), to assign the key as a Headset key enter 28 . (There is no associated Data entry.) To assign a Headset key to a DSS Console Feature Key: - In 2402-[01-60]: DSS Console Key Codes (page 801), to assign the key as a Headset key enter 28 .

  • Page 231: User Programmable Feature

    Headset Compatibility Operation In these instructions: Using the Headset [Super Display Soft Key] [Keyset Soft Key] To connect the headset: Plug a compatible headset into the telephone headset jack. To turn the headset mode on and off: Do one of the following. Press the headset Feature Key on your telephone or DSS Console.

  • Page 232: Hold

    Hold Hold Description Have a call wait on Hold, then pick it up to continue the conversation. Hold lets an extension user put a call in a temporary waiting state. The caller on Hold hears silence or Music on Hold, not conversation in the extension user’s work area. While the call waits on Hold, the extension user may process calls or use a system feature.

  • Page 233: Hold Recall Display

    Hold Hold Recall Display The Hold recall display identifies: The type of call recalling the extension. ❥ The extension which initially placed the call on Hold. ❥ The Hold recall displays occurs as the call is ringing the extension that initially placed it on Hold, and after the call diverts to Key Ring.
  • Page 234 Hold Other Related Features Features Call Timer (page 55) A user’s Call Timer starts when they pick up a call from Hold. If they place the call on Hold and another user picks it up, the timer restarts for the new user. Conference (page 89) If an extension user places a Conference on Hold, no other participants can place the Conference on Hold, split it, or terminate it.
  • Page 235 Hold In these instructions: Using System Hold [Super Display Soft Key] [Keyset Soft Key] Lift the handset and press INTERCOM Dial Dial the number of the line that is on Hold. • For example, dial for line 1. In these instructions: Using Exclusive Hold [Super Display Soft Key] [Keyset Soft Key]...
  • Page 236 Hold In these instructions: Using Hold at a Single Line Telephone [Super Display Soft Key] [Keyset Soft Key] To retrieve your call from Exclusive Hold: Lift the handset and dial *7 . To pick up an outside call on system Hold at a co-worker’s extension: •...

  • Page 237: Hotline

    Hotline Hotline Description Hotline provides partner extensions with one-button calling and Transfer. Hotline gives a keyset user with a programmed Hotline key one-button calling and Transfer to another exten- sion (the Hotline partner). Hotline helps co-workers that work closely together. The Hotline partners can call or Transfer calls to each other just by pressing a single key.
  • Page 238 Hotline Specify the type of Off-Hook Signaling available when a user presses the Hotline key for their busy Hotline partner. For Voice Over, in 2116-02: Off Hook Signaling for Calls from Hotline Partner (page 749) enter 2 . For Camp-On, in 2116-02: Off Hook Signaling for Calls from Hotline Partner (page 749) enter 1 . For no signaling, in 2116-02: Off Hook Signaling for Calls from Hotline Partner (page 749) enter 0 .

  • Page 239: User Programmable Feature

    Hotline Operation In these instructions: Using Hotline [Super Display Soft Key] [Keyset Soft Key] To place a call to your Hotline partner: Press your Hotline key. To transfer a call to your Hotline partner: While on a call, press your Hotline key. Do one of the following.

  • Page 240: Interactive Soft Keys

    Interactive Soft Keys Interactive Soft Keys Description Use advanced features just by pressing a soft key, without remembering feature codes. Interactive Soft Keys provide intuitive feature access. It is no longer necessary to remember feature codes to access the telephone’s advanced features because the function of the soft keys change as the user process calls. For example, while on an outside call a display keyset user can press the soft key to Park their call in orbit.

  • Page 241: Intercom

    Intercom Intercom Description Use Intercom to call any co-worker. Intercom gives extension users access to other extensions. This provides the system with complete internal calling capability. Handsfree Answerback and Forced Intercom Ringing Handsfree Answerback permits an extension user to respond to a voice-announced Intercom call by speak- ing toward the phone, without lifting the handset.
  • Page 242 Intercom Other Related Features Features Attendant Position (page 24) Designate each extension’s operator. Call Coverage Keys (page 40) A user can press a Call Coverage Key as an alternative to dialing Intercom numbers. Call Waiting / Camp-On (page 58) A user can Camp-On after placing an Intercom call to a busy co-worker. Callback (page 61) A user can leave a Callback request after placing an Intercom call to a busy co-worker.

  • Page 243: User Programmable Feature

    Intercom Operation In these instructions: Placing and Answering Intercom Calls [Super Display Soft Key] [Keyset Soft Key] To place an Intercom call: Lift handset and press INTERCOM Dial your co-worker’s extension number (300-427). • To call the operator, dial the operator’s extension number or dial (depending on your system setup).

  • Page 244: Key Ring

    Key Ring Key Ring Description So they are not forgotten, unanswered calls automatically ring co-worker’s extensions. A Key Ring line rings an extension according to the settings in 2132-[01-64]: Line Ringing (page 764). Mul- tiple extensions can be enabled to ring immediately or after a programmed delay for each incoming line call. In addition, under certain conditions other types of outside calls divert to Key Ring if unanswered.
  • Page 245 Key Ring Programming Should extension have Key Ring for the outside line? If yes: - In 2132-[01-64]: Line Ringing (page 764) enter one of the following:- for day and night ringing for night only ringing for delayed day and night ringing - For day mode Key Ring, in 3112-01: Direct Termination in the Day (page 819) press CLEAR - For night mode Key Ring, in 3112-04: Direct Termination at Night (page 820) press...
  • Page 246 Key Ring Other Related Features Features Call Coverage Keys (page 40) Call Coverage will pick up Key Ring calls. Call Forwarding (page 44) A Key Ring call will not follow an extension’s Call Forwarding. Call Waiting / Camp-On (page 58) A Key Ring call will not send Camp-On beeps to a busy extension that normally rings for that call.

  • Page 247: Language Selection

    Language Selection Language Selection Description Set up a telephone to show displays and soft keys in English or Spanish. Language Selection provides telephone displays for soft keys and system programming in English and Span- ish. You can select the language for each extension in system programming, or the extension user can choose their language via the soft keys.
  • Page 248 Language Selection Programming Should extension be able to set their display language? In 2102-01: Class of Service (page 724), check the extension’s Class of Service level. If yes, in 1401-11: Language Programming (page 631) enter Yes . If no, in 1401-11: Language Programming (page 631) enter No . From system programming, do you want to set an extensions display language as English or Spanish? For English, in 2101-03: Station Display Language (page 722) enter 1 .

  • Page 249: Last Number Redial

    Last Number Redial Last Number Redial Description Quickly redial the last number dialed. Last Number Redial allows an extension user to quickly redial the last outside number dialed. For example, a user may quickly recall a busy or unanswered number without manually dialing the digits. Last Number Redial saves in system memory the last 20 digits a user dials.
  • Page 250 Last Number Redial Programming Enable outgoing access on each line the user should use for Last Number Redial. In 2131-[01-64]: Line Access (page 763), enter one of the following: - 2 for outgoing access only - 3 for full access Should extension be able to use Enhanced Last Number Redial? In 2102-01: Class of Service (page 724), check the extension’s Class of Service level.
  • Page 251 Last Number Redial Operation In these instructions: Using Last Number Redial [Super Display Soft Key] [Keyset Soft Key] To redial your last call: Lift the handset. (Optional) Press an idle line key to preselect a line. • If you skip this step, the system automatically selects a line from the same group as your initial call. Press REDIAL •...
  • Page 252 Last Number Redial In these instructions: Using Enhanced Last Number Redial [Super Display Soft Key] [Keyset Soft Key] The system tries to use the same line as that used for your initial call. • If that line is busy, the system automatically selects a line from the same group as your initial call. •...

  • Page 253: Line Group Routing

    Line Group Routing Line Group Routing Description Dial a single code to place a call over the first available line in a Line Group. With Line Group Routing enabled, an extension user can just press INTERCOM and dial to place an out- side call.
  • Page 254 Line Group Routing Programming Check the extension’s dial 9 Line Group assignment. In 2113-01: Dial 9 Group (page 738), check the extension’s dial 9 group assignment. - By default, all extensions use group 90. In 3201-[01-64]: Line Group (page 833), be sure there are lines assigned to the extension’s dial 9 group. - A line can be in more than one group.

  • Page 255: Line Groups

    Line Groups Line Groups Description Dial codes to access Line Groups for outgoing calls. Extension users can optionally dial Line Group access codes 90-98 to select an available line in the group for outgoing calls. This is helpful in applications that have different services arranged into Line Groups. For example, dialing 90 could access a group of DDD lines for local calls, and dialing 91 could access a group of WATS lines for long distance calls.
  • Page 256 Line Groups Programming Verify the Line Group configurations. In 3201-[01-64]: Line Group (page 833), be sure lines are properly assigned to their respective groups. - A line can be in more than one group. Make sure the extension has access to the Line Groups. In 2131-[01-64]: Line Access (page 763), enter 2 (outgoing) or 3 (full) for each line the extension should be able to access.

  • Page 257: Line Keys

    Line Keys Line Keys Description Press a line key for one-touch access to an outside line. A line key provides an extension user with one-button access to outside lines. The extension user just presses a line key to place or answer a call on the line. There is no need to dial codes to access or intercept outside calls.
  • Page 258 Line Keys Programming Set up line keys for the extension or DSS Console. To set up a line key on an extension: - In 2121-[01 to 24]: Feature Key Codes (page 758), enter 03 . - In 2121-[01 to 24]: Feature Key Data (page 758), enter the line number ( 1-64 ). To set up a line key on a DSS Console: - In 2402-[01-60]: DSS Console Key Codes (page 801), enter 03 .

  • Page 259: User Programmable Feature

    Line Keys Operation In these instructions: Using your Line Keys [Super Display Soft Key] [Keyset Soft Key] To place a call using a line key: Lift the handset. Press the line key. Dial the outside number. To answer an incoming call using a line key. Listen for ringing and look for the flashing line key.

  • Page 260: Line Queuing / Line Callback

    Line Queuing / Line Callback Line Queuing / Line Callback Description - When all lines are busy, Line Queuing lets a user wait in line for a line to become free. - Line Callback will automatically call the user back when a line is available. Line Queuing Line Queueing permits an extension user to queue (wait in line) on hook for a busy line or Line Group to become free.
  • Page 261 Line Queuing / Line Callback Programming Should extension be able to queue for a busy line? In 2102-01: Class of Service (page 724), check the extension’s Class of Service level. If yes, in 1411-01: Camp-On to Busy Lines (page 647) enter - This option does not restrict Line Callback.
  • Page 262 Line Queuing / Line Callback Operation In these instructions: Using Line Queuing and Line Callback [Super Display Soft Key] [Keyset Soft Key] To queue or leave a callback for a busy line: Do one of the following. Press the line key for the busy line. Press INTERCOM and dial the Direct Line Access code (e.g., 101 for line 1).

  • Page 263: Loop Keys

    Loop Keys Loop Keys Description Loop keys simplify answering and placing calls. Loop keys are Feature Keys that simplify the way extension users place and answer outside calls. There are two types of loop keys: Switched Loop keys and Fixed Loop keys. Switched Loop Keys For incoming calls, Switched Loop keys provide an appearance for any line not assigned to a line key for which the extension has access and ringing.
  • Page 264 Loop Keys Programming To set up a Switched Loop key: In 2121-[01 to 24]: Feature Key Codes (page 758), enter 01 . - There is no Data entry. To set up a Fixed Loop key: In 2121-[01 to 24]: Feature Key Codes (page 758), enter 02 . In 2121-[01 to 24]: Feature Key Data (page 758), enter the Line Group number for the key (90-98).
  • Page 265 Loop Keys Ringing Line Preference (page 295) Ringing Line Preference allows an extension user to answer a call ringing a loop key just by lifting the handset. IntraMail Features None Operation In these instructions: Using Loop Keys [Super Display Soft Key] [Keyset Soft Key] To answer a call on a loop key: Listen for ringing and look for the flashing (red) loop key.

  • Page 266: Meet-Me Conference

    Meet-Me Conference Meet-Me Conference Description Set up a multiple-party telephone conversation with your co-workers. With Meet-Me Conference, an extension user can set up a telephone meeting with their co-workers. Each party joins the Conference by dialing a Meet Me Conference code. Meet Me Conference lets extension users have a telephone meeting —...
  • Page 267 Meet-Me Conference IntraMail Features None Operation In these instructions: Using Meet-Me Conference [Super Display Soft Key] [Keyset Soft Key] To set up a Meet-Me Conference: Page parties and announce the Meet-Me Conference code (#11 or #12). Do one of the following. •...

  • Page 268: Message Waiting

    Message Waiting Message Waiting Description For systems without voice mail, leave a Message Waiting request for a return call. An extension user can leave a Message Waiting indication at a busy or unanswered extension requesting a return call. The indication is a flashing V-MAIL key and Ring/Message lamp at the called extension. Answer- ing the Message Waiting automatically calls the extension which left the indication.
  • Page 269 Message Waiting Programming Should the system have Message Waiting capability? If yes, in 4101-01: Voice Mail Type (page 863) enter - The system can have either Message Waiting or voice mail, not both. If no, in 4101-01: Voice Mail Type (page 863) enter on of the following: for Built-In Automated Attendant for IntraMail for UltraMail (DSX-80/160 only)
  • Page 270 Message Waiting Operation In these instructions: Using Message Waiting [Super Display Soft Key] [Keyset Soft Key] To leave a Message Waiting: Place Intercom call to a co-worker. • The extension you call can be unanswered, busy, or in Do Not Disturb. Press V-MAIL .

  • Page 271: Microphone Mute

    Microphone Mute Microphone Mute Description Talk to a co-worker in your office without your caller hearing the conversation. Microphone Mute lets a keyset user turn off their phone’s handset or Handsfree microphone at any time. While the extension is on-hook, Microphone Mute mutes the Handsfree microphone. While off-hook, Microphone Mute mutes the handset microphone.
  • Page 272 Microphone Mute Operation In these instructions: Using Microphone Mute [Super Display Soft Key] [Keyset Soft Key] To activate or deactivate Microphone Mute: Press MUTE . • You can do this any time while on the phone or idle (except when an Intercom call is ringing). •...

  • Page 273: Monitor / Silent Monitor

    Monitor / Silent Monitor Monitor / Silent Monitor Description Monitor a co-worker’s phone conversation without them knowing you are on the phone. Monitor lets an extension user listen to the conversation at a busy extension. To implement Monitor, an extension user just calls a busy extension and dials the Monitor code. The busy extension and their caller have no indication of the intrusion.
  • Page 274 Monitor / Silent Monitor Operation In these instructions: Using Monitor / Silent Monitor [Super Display Soft Key] [Keyset Soft Key] To Monitor a call: Place an Intercom call to the busy extension. • Listen for busy or busy/ring tone. Dial 6 . Listen to the conversation in progress.

  • Page 275: Multiple Directory Numbers

    Multiple Directory Numbers Multiple Directory Numbers Description See Call Coverage Keys (page 40) for more. Features ◆ 245 DSX Software Manual...

  • Page 276: Music On Hold

    Authors and Publishers (ASCAP) or other similar organizations, if radio, television broadcasts or music other than material not in the public domain are transmitted through the Music on Hold feature of telecom- munications systems. NEC Unified Solutions, Inc. hereby disclaims any liability arising out of the failure to obtain such a license.
  • Page 277 Music on Hold Programming Should the system have Music on Hold? If yes, 1521-01: Enable Music on Hold (page 659) enter If no, in 1521-01: Enable Music on Hold (page 659) enter Assign the Music on Hold Source to each line. In 3103-05: Music On Hold Source (page 816), assign the MOH source: for none for audio input minijack 1...
  • Page 278 Music on Hold Operation Music on Hold is automatic once enabled. 248 ◆ Features DSX Software Manual...

  • Page 279: Names For Extensions And Lines

    Names for Extensions and Lines Names for Extensions and Lines Description Names help identify lines and extensions. Extensions and lines can have names instead of just circuit numbers. These names show on a keyset’s dis- play when the user places or answers calls. Extension and line names make it easier to identify callers. The user does not have to refer to a directory when processing calls.
  • Page 280 Names for Extensions and Lines 2201-01: Ring Group Name (page 779) ❥ 2301-01: UCD Group Name (page 790) ❥ 2501-[01-16]: Selectable Display Messages (page 806) ❥ 3101-02: Line Name (page 810) ❥ 4111-01: Voice Mail Port Name (page 865) ❥ 904x-Backup/Restore (page 927) ❥...

  • Page 281: Name Programming Chart

    Names for Extensions and Lines Name Programming Chart Name Programming Chart Press a key the indicated number of times for desired character 1 Time 2 Times 3 Times 4 Times 5 Times 6 Times 7 Times 8 Times 9 Times &...

  • Page 282: Night Service / Night Ring

    Night Service / Night Ring Night Service / Night Ring Description Use Night Service to reroute calls after hours. Night Service redirects outside calls to their night mode destination. Typically, the attendant or supervisor activates Night Service after normal working hours, when most employees are unavailable to answer calls. Lines can ring extensions directly at Night, providing specific answering points for Night Service calls.
  • Page 283 Night Service / Night Ring Option 4: DIL Day and Night The line is a DIL during the day and at night. The DIL destination’s key controls the night mode of the line. Turn to Direct Inward Line (page 109) for more on setting up Direct Inward Lines. Conditions •...
  • Page 284 Night Service / Night Ring Other Related Features Features Direct Inward Line (page 109) • The extension to which the DIL is terminated controls the night mode of the DIL. • If a DIL is terminated to the voice mail master number, a UCD night key (code 18 + the voice mail master number) controls the night mode status of the DIL.

  • Page 285: Off-Hook Signaling

    Off-Hook Signaling Off-Hook Signaling Description Off-Hook Signaling helps important callers get through. When a user is busy on a call, Off-Hook Signaling indicates that another caller is trying to get through. Off-Hook Signaling helps important callers get through, without waiting in line for the called extension to become free.
  • Page 286 Off-Hook Signaling Default Setting • Off-Hook Signaling for outside calls is set for Off-Hook Ringing (option 2) by default. While busy on a call, the extension will receive Off-Hook Ringing for outside calls that normally ring the phone. This includes: - Key Ring calls - Transferred outside calls - Direct Inward Lines...

  • Page 287: User Programmable Feature

    Off-Hook Signaling Hold (page 202) An extension user can place their current call on Hold and answer the waiting call. Hotline (page 207) Hotline activates Off-Hook Signaling. Key Ring (page 214) Off-Hook Signaling can occur for Key Ring calls. Park (page 266) An extension user can Park their current call and answer the waiting call.

  • Page 288: One-Touch Keys

    One-Touch Keys One-Touch Keys Description Available for Personal Speed Dial. See Speed Dial (page 315) for more. 258 ◆ Features DSX Software Manual...

  • Page 289: Paging

    Paging Paging Description Use Paging to broadcast announcements or quickly locate co-workers. Paging lets extension users broadcast announcements to other keyset users and to external Paging speakers. Paging allows a user to locate a co-worker or make an announcement without calling each extension individ- ually.

  • Page 290: Outside Call Ringing Over External Page

    Paging The equipment you connect to a system relay must be compatible with the following specifications. Refer to your system’s Hardware Manual for more on connecting to the system relay contacts. Relay Contact Specifications DSX-40 Contact Configuration: Normally open Maximum Load: 0.5A @ 120 VAC 1A @ 24 VDC Maximum Initial Contact Resistance...
  • Page 291 Paging Conditions • None Default Setting • All Call and Zone Paging allowed. • Ringing, Door Box chimes, and Background Music do not broadcast over External Paging. Programming Basic Programming Should extension be able to receive Paging announcements? If yes: - In 2113-05: Page Group (Zone) (page 740), assign the zone to which the extension belongs (1-7 or 0 for All Call only).
  • Page 292 Paging - For relay 2, in 2101-06: Door Relay Assignment (page 723) for the Door Box extension enter 2 . If no, in 2101-06: Door Relay Assignment (page 723) for the Door Box extension, enter 0 . External Paging Options Optionally enable outside line ringing over External Paging.
  • Page 293 Paging Use 1531-05: External Page Gain (page 664) to additionally control the volume of the system’s External Page port audio output. Optionally enable Background Music over External Paging. In 1521-04: Background Music over External Page (page 660), enter Check Background Music (page 34) to be sure Background Music is programmed and installed. In 1531-03: External Page Ring Volume (page 663), adjust the system’s External Page port audio output volume as required.

  • Page 294: User Programmable Feature

    Paging Operation In these instructions: Making a Page Announcement [Super Display Soft Key] [Keyset Soft Key] To make an internal Paging announcement: Lift the handset. Do one of the following. Press INTERCOM , dial *1 , then dial the page zone number ( 1 - 7 or 0 for All Call). Press your Paging key.

  • Page 295: Paging, Meet-Me Conference

    Paging, Meet-Me Conference Paging, Meet-Me Conference Description Available. Refer to Meet-Me Conference (page 236) for more. Features ◆ 265 DSX Software Manual...

  • Page 296: Park

    Park Park Description Park a call in orbit so a co-worker can pick it up. With Park, it is not necessary to locate a person to handle their calls. Park places an outside call in a waiting state (called a Park Orbit) so that an extension user may pick it up. There are two types of Park: System and Personal.

  • Page 297: Personal Park Orbit Recall Display

    Park Personal Park Orbit Recall Display The Personal Park Orbit recall display shows: On all extensions that are ringing with the recall: ❥ - The type of recall (i.e., Personal Park). On the extension at which the call is parked (while it is ringing): ❥...
  • Page 298 Park Key Ring (page 214) Unanswered Park recalls divert to Key Ring. Music on Hold (page 246) If installed, Music on Hold plays to parked callers. Off-Hook Signaling (page 255) An extension user can Park their current call and answer the waiting call. Voice Mail (page 372) When an extension user with Ring No Answer/Busy Terminal Hunting to voice mail parks a call at a co-worker’s extension, the call recalls to them if not picked up.
  • Page 299 Park In these instructions: Park [Super Display Soft Key] [Keyset Soft Key] If a call in Personal Park recalls, you see one of the following. If the extension that parked the call doesn’t have a name: Personal Park Recall STA 301 If the extension that parked the call has a programmed name: Personal Park Recall 300: Attendant...

  • Page 300: Pbx / Centrex Compatibility

    PBX / Centrex Compatibility PBX / Centrex Compatibility Description The DSX provides unique features when connected to a PBX or Centrex. PBX/Centrex Access Codes PBX Access Codes are the digits PBX extension users must dial to obtain outside lines. When the DSX is installed behind a PBX, users must dial these codes before the digits for their outside call.

  • Page 301: Pbx/Centrex Access Codes And Smdr

    PBX / Centrex Compatibility If 1551-04: Account Code Toll Restriction Level = 0 If an extension user: ❥ - Seizes the line, - Dials a valid PBX Access Code, - Dials a number that begins with 0 or 1, DSX requires the user to enter an Account Code for the call. PBX/Centrex Access Codes and SMDR The following occurs if a DSX line is programmed as a PBX line and access codes are properly entered in the PBX Access Codes Table:...

  • Page 302: Pc Program (System Administrator)

    PC Program (System Administrator) PC Program (System Administrator) Description Use your PC or laptop to program the system remotely or while on-site. The PC Program is a Windows -based application you can use for programming the telephone system and maintaining site databases, instead of using the conventional telephone programming. The PC Program provides: On-Line Programming (Direct Connection) ●...
  • Page 303 PC Program (System Administrator) Conditions • N/A Default Setting • N/A Programming Other Related Features Operation Refer to the PC Program User’s Guide. Features ◆ 273 DSX Software Manual...

  • Page 304: Prime Line Preference

    Prime Line Preference Prime Line Preference Description Get dial tone for a new outside or Intercom call just by lifting the handset. Prime Line Preference allows an extension user to place or answer a call by just lifting the handset. The user does not have to press a line key, loop key, or the INTERCOM key first.
  • Page 305 Prime Line Preference Programming Set an extension’s Prime Line type. For key: - In 2114-01: Prime Line Type (page 741), enter - In 2114-01: Prime Line Key (page 741), enter the number of a line or loop key: for Feature Keys 1-24. 1-14 INTERCOM - This option is not available to single line telephones.

  • Page 306: User Programmable Feature

    Prime Line Preference Operation In these instructions: Using Prime Line Preference [Super Display Soft Key] [Keyset Soft Key] To place a call on your Prime Line: Lift the handset. • To bypass your prime line, press another key (such as a line or loop key) before lifting the handset. Dial call normally.

  • Page 307: Privacy

    Privacy Privacy Description Use Privacy to prevent interruptions at high priority extensions. An extension with Privacy blocks incoming Barge In attempts and Call Waiting (Camp-On) signals. Privacy helps extension users that don’t want their conversations interrupted. Note that if an extension with Privacy enabled is on a call with an extension with Privacy disabled, they are still subject to Barge In attempts and Call Waiting signals to the non-private extension.

  • Page 308: Privacy Release Groups

    Privacy Release Groups Privacy Release Groups Description Quickly join in a co-worker’s outside call. You can program extensions into Privacy Release Groups to simplify sharing outside calls. Co-workers in the same Privacy Release Group can easily join another group member’s outside call just by pressing the busy line -key.
  • Page 309 Privacy Release Groups Programming Should an extension be in a Privacy Release Group? If yes: - In 2113-04: Privacy Group (page 740), enter the Privacy Release Group number ( - Make sure the group members have line keys for the lines they want to share. - In 2131-[01-64]: Line Access (page 763), assign access to the lines group members should share: for no access for incoming access only...

  • Page 310: Private Line

    Private Line Private Line Description You can have a line reserved exclusively for your own use. A Private Line is a line reserved for a keyset for placing and answering calls. A user with a Private Line knows when important calls are for them. Additionally, the user has their own line for placing calls that is not available to others in the system.
  • Page 311 Private Line Should Private Line ring for incoming calls? If yes: - In 2132-[01-64]: Line Ringing (page 764) enter the type of ringing as required: for day and night ringing for night ringing only for delay ringing day and night - For delay ringing (option 4 only), in 1604-01: Delay Ring Timer (page 678) adjust the Delay Ring timer as required.

  • Page 312: Programmable Idle Menu Soft Keys (Super Display)

    Programmable Idle Menu Soft Keys (Super Display) Programmable Idle Menu Soft Keys (Super Display) Description Customize the Super Display Telephone idle menu soft keys to exactly meet the user’s needs. The Super Display Telephone idle menu soft keys are customizable in system programming and by the extension user.
  • Page 313 Programmable Idle Menu Soft Keys (Super Display) (Page 2 of 2) Super Display Telephone Idle Menu Soft Key Options Entry Display Description Press to access Personal Speed Dial bins 711-720. The display shows SP Dial 2 the Speed Dial number (or name - if programmed). Press to access the associated Personal Speed Dial bin (701-720).

  • Page 314: User Programmable Feature

    Programmable Idle Menu Soft Keys (Super Display) Operation In these instructions: Customizing your Idle Menu Soft keys (Super Display Only) [Super Display Soft Key] To customize your idle menu soft keys: Do not press any keys and do not lift the handset. Dial #SM (#76).

  • Page 315: Pulse To Tone Conversion

    Pulse to Tone Conversion Pulse to Tone Conversion Description Use special services (such as telephone banking) over dial pulse lines. An extension can use Pulse to Tone Conversion while placing an outside call to change the dialing mode from dial pulse to DTMF. For a system in a dial pulse area, this permits users to access DTMF services (such as telephone banking) from their DP area.

  • Page 316: Regional Defaults

    Regional Defaults Regional Defaults Description The system is compatible with both North American and Latin American applications. Use the Regional Defaults capability to switch your system from the North American mode to the Latin American mode. Switching your system to the Latin American mode makes the following changes: The default language in programming, SMDR, and all telephone displays is Spanish.

  • Page 317: Removing Lines And Extensions From Service

    Removing Lines and Extensions from Service Removing Lines and Extensions from Service Description Temporarily remove problem extensions and lines from service until they can be repaired. Supervisors and attendants can remove problem lines and extensions from service. This helps ensure maxi- mum system performance.
  • Page 318 Removing Lines and Extensions from Service Operation In these instructions: Removing Lines and Extensions from Service [Super Display Soft Key] [Keyset Soft Key] To remove or return an extension or line to service: Press INTERCOM . Dial #40 . Do one of the following. Dial the number of the extension you want to remove or return to service (e.g., 302).

  • Page 319: Reverse Voice Over

    Reverse Voice Over Reverse Voice Over Description Privately call a co-worker while you’re busy on your handset. While on a handset call, Reverse Voice Over lets a busy keyset user make a private Intercom call to an idle co-worker. The busy user just presses and holds down a programmed Reverse Voice Over key to make a pri- vate call to the assigned co-worker.
  • Page 320 Reverse Voice Over Programming To set up Reverse Voice Over keys on an extension: In 2121-[01 to 24]: Feature Key Codes (page 758), enter 23 . In 2121-[01 to 24]: Feature Key Data (page 758), enter the Reverse Voice Over partner’s extension number. Other Related Features Features Conference (page 89)
  • Page 321 Reverse Voice Over Operation In these instructions: Using Reverse Voice Over [Super Display Soft Key] [Keyset Soft Key] To place a call using Reverse Voice Over: While on a handset call, press and hold your Reverse Voice Over key. • You hear two beeps, then you can talk to your co-worker. •...

  • Page 322: Ring Groups

    Ring Groups Ring Groups Description Available. See Group Ring (page 189). 292 ◆ Features DSX Software Manual...

  • Page 323: Ringdown Extension

    Ringdown Extension Ringdown Extension Description Call another extension, group or voice mail just by lifting the handset. A Ringdown Extension automatically calls a co-worker, voice mail, a Ring Group, a UCD Group, or a Speed Dial number when the user lifts the handset. The call automatically goes through — there is no need for the user to dial digits or press additional keys.
  • Page 324 Ringdown Extension Operation In these instructions: Using Ringdown [Super Display Soft Key] [Keyset Soft Key] To use the Ringdown extension: Lift the handset or press SPEAKER . To bypass Ringdown: Press INTERCOM , a line/loop key, or a Feature Key before lifting the handset or pressing SPEAKER . 294 ◆...

  • Page 325: Ringing Line Preference

    Ringing Line Preference Ringing Line Preference Description Simply lift the handset to answer a ringing call. Ringing Line Preference lets a keyset user answer a ringing call by just lifting the handset. For a user that primarily answers calls, Ringing Line Preference ensures that ringing calls have priority. The tables below show the interaction between Ringing Line Preference and other features for both handset and headset calls.

  • Page 326: Prime Line Vs. Ringing Line Preference

    Ringing Line Preference Keyset Attendant RLP = Y RLP = N RLP = Y RLP = N Feature Does pressing SPEAKER while in the Headset mode answer the ringing call? Intercom (page 211) Ringing Intercom calls Key Ring (page 214) (Line/Loop Keys) Transfer (page 358) Direct Inward Line (page 109)

  • Page 327: User Programmable Feature

    Ringing Line Preference Other Related Features Features Attendant Call Queuing (page 22) Ringing Line Preference will not answer a call ringing the Operator Call Key. Intercom (page 211) Ringing Line Preference answers a ringing Intercom call before a ringing outside call. Prime Line Preference (page 274) Prime Line Preference overrides Ringing Line Preference.

  • Page 328: Save Number Dialed

    Save Number Dialed Save Number Dialed Description Save the number you just dialed for quick redialing. Save Number Dialed permits an extension user to save their last outside number and easily redial it later on. For example, an extension user can recall a busy or unanswered number without manually dialing the digits. The system retains the saved number until the user stores a new one in its place.
  • Page 329 Save Number Dialed IntraMail Features None Operation In these instructions: Using Save Number Dialed [Super Display Soft Key] [Keyset Soft Key] To save the outside number you just dialed (up to 32 digits): Press the Save Number Dialed key on your extension or DSS Console. To redial a saved number: (Optional) Press a line key to preselect a line key for the call.

  • Page 330: Selectable Display Messaging

    Selectable Display Messaging Selectable Display Messaging Description While you’re away from the phone, callers can receive personalized text messages you set up. An extension user can select a pre programmed Selectable Display Message for their extension. Keyset call- ers see the selected message when they call the user’s extension. Selectable Display Messaging provides per- sonalized text messaging.
  • Page 331 Selectable Display Messaging Programming Should extension be able to enable Selectable Display Messaging? In 2102-01: Class of Service (page 724), check the extension’s Class of Service level. If yes, in 1406-02: Internal Call Forwarding (page 643) enter If no, in 1406-02: Internal Call Forwarding (page 643) enter - Disabling this option will disable all internal Call Forwarding for the extension.
  • Page 332 Selectable Display Messaging Operation In these instructions: Setting Up Selectable Display Messaging [Super Display Soft Key] [Keyset Soft Key] To select a Selectable Display Message: Select the Call Forwarding options. [Menu + Call Forward] Alternately do one of the following: [Menu + Cfwd] •...

  • Page 333: Name Programming Chart

    Selectable Display Messaging Name Programming Chart Name Programming Chart Press a key the indicated number of times for desired character 1 Time 2 Times 3 Times 4 Times 5 Times 6 Times 7 Times 8 Times 9 Times & ‘ space Not used Not used...

  • Page 334: Silent Monitor

    Silent Monitor Silent Monitor Description Available. See Monitor / Silent Monitor (page 243) for more. 304 ◆ Features DSX Software Manual...

  • Page 335: Single Line Telephones

    Single Line Telephones Single Line Telephones Description Connect analog devices such as single line telephones and fax machines to the system. The system is compatible with 500 type (dial pulse) and 2500 type (DTMF) analog telephone devices. This includes on-premises single line telephones (SLTs), fax machines, and modems. In DSX-40, SLTs connect to analog ports in the main equipment cabinet.
  • Page 336 Single Line Telephones Programming Should the SLT extension follow the ringing pattern of the incoming line? In 2102-01: Class of Service (page 724), check the extension’s Class of Service level. If yes, in 1403-02: Single Ring for Single Line Set (page 635) enter Yes . If no, in 1403-02: Single Ring for Single Line Set (page 635) enter No .
  • Page 337 Single Line Telephones Operation Barge In Do one of the following. Call busy extension. Dial the line extension number (e.g., 101) for Direct Line Access. Dial + Line number for Line Dial-up. Dial for Line Group Access. Dial Join the conversation in progress. Call Forwarding Lift the handset and dial Do one of the following.
  • Page 338 Single Line Telephones Call Waiting / Camp-On Call busy extension. Dial 2 but do not hang up. • If you hang up, the system converts your Camp-On to a Callback. Speak to your co-worker when they answer their Camp-On ring. Callback Call busy extension.
  • Page 339 Single Line Telephones Direct Line Access Dial outside number. Directed Call Pickup Lift the handset. Dial Dial number of extension whose call you want to intercept. • To intercept a call ringing an attendant, dial the attendant’s extension number (e.g., 300); not 0 or 01-04. Door Box To place a call to the Door Box: Lift the handset.
  • Page 340 Single Line Telephones Group Call Pickup Lift the handset. Dial *# . Hold To retrieve a line on System Hold at a co-worker’s extension: Lift the handset. Dial *4 . Dial the number of the line that is on Hold (e.g., 01 for line 1). To place a call on Exclusive Hold: Hookflash and dial *7 .
  • Page 341 Single Line Telephones Meet-Me Conference Dial the announced Meet-Me Conference code (#11 or #12). • Your co-worker’s must join the telephone meeting within the Meet Me Conference time. To join a Meet-Me Conference: Listen for paged invitation to join the Conference. Dial announced Meet-Me Conference code (#11 or #12).
  • Page 342 Single Line Telephones Park To Park a call: Place or answer call. Hookflash and dial * . Dial the orbit number. • System Park Orbits are 60-69. • Personal Park Orbits are *300-*427. To retrieve a parked call: Lift the handset. Dial * .
  • Page 343 Single Line Telephones Split A single line telephone can Split (alternate) between their current call and waiting calls. The waiting calls can include a call you previously placed on Exclusive Hold or camped-on calls. To Split (Alternate) between your current call and a waiting call: Hookflash and dial •...

  • Page 344: Soft Keys

    Soft Keys Soft Keys Description Available. SeeInteractive Soft Keys (page 210) for more. 314 ◆ Features DSX Software Manual...

  • Page 345: Speed Dial

    Speed Dial Speed Dial Description Instead of dialing a long telephone number to reach a client or customer, use Speed Dial instead. Also, store Intercom digits for quick access to commonly used features. Speed Dial gives an extension user quick access to frequently called numbers. There are two types of Speed Dial: System and Personal.

  • Page 346: Chaining Bins For Dialing Long Numbers

    Speed Dial Note that this unique Centrex integration also pertains to voice mail ports accessing stored Speed Dial numbers. Chaining Bins for Dialing Long Numbers A Speed Dial number can be up to 32 digits long. The system allows this by automatically using the next adjacent bin for entries longer than 16 digits.
  • Page 347 Speed Dial Programming Setting Up Personal Speed Dial Should extension be able to use Personal Speed Dial? If yes: - In 2111-09: Personal Speed Dial (page 734) enter - In 2131-[01-64]: Line Access (page 763), make sure the extension has outgoing ( ) or full ( access to the lines they want to use for Personal Speed Dial.
  • Page 348 Speed Dial Should the system have 9 (1-digit), 99 (2-digit), or 999 (3-digit) System Speed Dial numbers? For 9 (1-digit), in 1701-01: Number of System Speed Dial Bins (page 714) enter 1 . For 99 (2-digit), in 1701-01: Number of System Speed Dial Bins (page 714) enter 2 . For 999 (3-digit), in 1701-01: Number of System Speed Dial Bins (page 714) enter 3 .
  • Page 349 Speed Dial Is a Flash stored in a Speed Dial bin the correct duration? If yes, leave 1612-04: PBX/Centrex Flash Timer (page 686) at its current setting. If no, adjust 1612-04: PBX/Centrex Flash Timer (page 686) as required. Are Speed Dial calls correctly detecting dial tone? If yes, leave 1602-03: Dialtone Detect Timer (page 671) at its current setting.
  • Page 350 Speed Dial In these instructions: Programming and Dialing Personal Speed Dial [Super Display Soft Key] [Keyset Soft Key] Enter the Line Group number you want the system to use when dialing your stored number (90-98). Press INTERCOM if you want to enter Intercom codes. Press HOLD .

  • Page 351: User Programmable Features

    Speed Dial In these instructions: Programming and Dialing System Speed Dial [Super Display Soft Key] [Keyset Soft Key] Enter the line number you want the system to use when dialing your stored number (1-64). Enter the Line Group number you want the system to use when dialing your stored number (90-98). Press if you want to enter Intercom codes.

  • Page 352: Name Programming Chart

    Speed Dial Programming System Speed Dial Feature Mnemonic Operation Access Level Speed Dial #SP (#77) + Dial System Speed Dial bin number (e.g., 201) + + Enter outside line (e.g., 1), Line Group (e.g., 90), HOLD or INTERCOM for Intercom feature + HOLD + Number to store + HOLD twice + Name + HOLD + Dial another bin or SPEAKER to exit.

  • Page 353: Split (Alternate)

    Split (Alternate) Split (Alternate) Description Switch between active calls without Conferencing the calls together. With Split, an extension user can split (alternate) between a current call and a new call. Split lets the exten- sion user easily alternate between the calls without joining (Conferencing) the parties together. Conditions •...
  • Page 354 Split (Alternate) Operation In these instructions: Using Split [Super Display Soft Key] [Keyset Soft Key] To Split between your current Intercom call and a new Intercom call: Press HOLD to place your Intercom call on Hold. Press INTERCOM to answer your new Intercom call. •...

  • Page 355: Station Key Telephones

    Station Key Telephones Station Key Telephones Description System keysets provide a host of sophisticated extension features. The system offers 22-Button, 34-Button, 34-Button Advanced, and Super Display keyset telephones. All telephone models are available in two colors: black and white. 22-Button Display Telephone with Speakerphone The 22-Button Display Telephone features a large 3 line- by-24 character alphanumeric display with 4 Interactive Soft Keys for intuitive feature access.

  • Page 356: Ring/Message Lamp

    Station Key Telephones 34-Button Backlit Super Display Telephone with Half-Duplex Speakerphone The Super Display Telephone is the system’s most sophis- ticated telephone instrument. It features a large 9 line-by- 24 character backlit alphanumeric display with 12 Interac- tive Soft Keys for intuitive feature access. It also provides 10 Personal Speed Dial bin keys, 24 programmable Fea- ture Keys and 12 fixed function keys for streamlined oper- ation.
  • Page 357 Station Key Telephones Programming Extension Circuit Type In 2101-01: Station Type (page 719), the system automatically detects the following circuit types when a device is connected to a digital station port: for Undefined for DSX 22 Button for DSX 34 Button for DSX Super Display for DS 22 Button Non-display for DS 22 Button Display...

  • Page 358: Station Message Detail Recording

    Station Message Detail Recording Station Message Detail Recording Description SMDR provides a printed record of your calls. Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR) provides a record of the system’s outside calls. Typically, the record outputs to a customer-provided printer, terminal or SMDR data collection device. SMDR allows you to monitor the usage at each extension and line.
  • Page 359 Station Message Detail Recording SMDR Report Format (Page 1 of 2) SMDR Report Format Line Character Field Report Start Header 1-32 STATION MESSAGE DETAIL RECORDING 33,34 Carriage return, line feed 1-10 Date (mm/dd/yyyy) Space 12-16 Time (hh:mm:ss) A (for am) or P (for pm) 18,19 Carriage return, line feed Carriage return, line feed...
  • Page 360 Station Message Detail Recording (Page 2 of 2) SMDR Report Format Line Character Field Space Space - characters + character - characters + character 9-40 - characters + character 42-51 - characters + character 53-61 - characters + character 63-70 - characters + character 72-74...
  • Page 361 Station Message Detail Recording Programming Should the system output SMDR? If yes: - In 1541-01: SMDR Port (page 666), enter to enable the RS-232 port to output SMDR. - In 1101-01: Baud Rate (page 603), set the baud rate of the RS-232 port: for 2400 for 9600 for19,200...
  • Page 362 Station Message Detail Recording Operation SMDR is automatic once enabled. 332 ◆ Features DSX Software Manual...

  • Page 363: System Administrator (Pc Program)

    System Administrator (PC Program) System Administrator (PC Program) Description Available. See PC Program (System Administrator) (page 272) for more. Features ◆ 333 DSX Software Manual...

  • Page 364: System Identification

    System Identification System Identification Description Store the site name and telephone number in the system data base. The system administrator can enter the site name and telephone number into the system data base. This information is saved into system memory. Conditions •...

  • Page 365: System Programming Backup And Restore

    System Programming Backup and Restore System Programming Backup and Restore Description Use a CompactFlash Card to back up and restore the site data. To prevent the loss of essential custom site programming, use a CompactFlash Card plugged into the Intra- Mail CompactFlash slot to back up the system database.

  • Page 366: System Programming Password Protection

    System Programming Password Protection System Programming Password Protection Description Control access to system programming. The system controls access to the programmable options according to the programming password the administrator enters. There are three password levels: Logging On with this Gives you access to these programs: Password: System Administrator 1 (level 1) 1001-01: System Type (page 595)
  • Page 367 System Programming Password Protection IntraMail Features None Operation None Features ◆ 337 DSX Software Manual...

  • Page 368: T1 Lines

    T1 Lines T1 Lines Description In DSX-80/160, provides for connection to advanced digital lines and simplifies installation. T1 lines require a unique T1 PCB (P/N 80061) and give the system a maximum of 24 lines in a single PCB slot. The available T1 line types include: Loop Start (DTMF and Dial Pulse) ❥...
  • Page 369 T1 Lines Programming Set the circuit type for each T1 line. Be sure your T1PCB is installed and connected, and that your telco is providing T1 service. In 3101-01: Line Type (page 809), enter the correct circuit type for each T1 line. •...
  • Page 370 T1 Lines To set up T1 lines for compatibility with ANI/DNIS service: To enable ANI-based Caller ID, in 3121-01: Caller ID Type (page 825) enter 3 . In 3121-02: ANI/DNIS Format (page 825), specify the type of ANI/DNIS received from the telco: - 0 for no ANI/DNIS data - 1 for ANI - 2 for *ANI*...

  • Page 371: Tandem Calls / Unsupervised Conference

    Tandem Calls / Unsupervised Conference Tandem Calls / Unsupervised Conference Description Join two callers in Conference, leave the call and let their conversation continue. Tandem Calls allows an extension user to join two outside callers in a line-to-line conference. The extension user can then drop out of the call, leaving the lines in an Unsupervised Conference.
  • Page 372 Tandem Calls / Unsupervised Conference Other Related Features Features Forced Line Disconnect (page 182) An extension user can end an Unsupervised Conference by using Forced Line Disconnect on one of the lines in the tandem call. Single Line Telephones (page 305) Tandem Calling is available at Single Line extensions.
  • Page 373 Tandem Calls / Unsupervised Conference In these instructions: Barging in on a Tandem Call [Super Display Soft Key] [Keyset Soft Key] To Barge In on a Tandem Call: Do one of the following. Press the line key for the busy line. Press and dial the line’s Direct Line Access code (e.g., 101 for line 1).

  • Page 374: Tie Lines

    Tie Lines Tie Lines Description In DSX-80/160, link two systems together for inter-system Intercom calling and other features. Tie lines directly link a local DSX-80/160 telephone system with one or more remote DSX-80/160 systems. The link is independent of the telco's switched network. When a local system user seizes a tie line, they hear Intercom dial tone from the remote system.
  • Page 375 Tie Lines Should an incoming tie line restrict the incoming caller from using certain features and dialing certain outgoing calls? To restrict feature access: - In 3102-01: Line Class of Service (page 813), check the tie line’s Class of Service level. - In 14xx-COS (Class of Service) (page 628), restrict Class of Service options as required.
  • Page 376 Tie Lines Operation Call Waiting / Camp-On Access the tie line and call busy extension. Dial 2 but do not hang up. • If you hang up, the system converts your Camp-On to a Callback. Speak to your co-worker when they answer their Camp-On ring. Central Office Calls, Placing Access the tie line.
  • Page 377 Tie Lines Intercom To place an Intercom call: Access the tie line. Dial the extension number. • To call the remote system’s operator, dial • The call rings the destination extension. Night Service / Night Ring To answer a call ringing over the paging system: Access the tie line.
  • Page 378 Tie Lines Transfer To transfer your call to a user in the remote system: Place or answer call. • Transferring an outside call over the tie line requires that the tie line have Tandem Calls enabled and that the extension have Unsupervised Conference enabled in their Class of Service. Press TRANSFER , access the tie line, and dial the extension to which you want to Transfer the call.

  • Page 379: Time And Date

    Time and Date Time and Date Description The Time and Date shows on telephone displays and prints on system reports. The system Time and Date appears on display telephones and Station Message Detail Recording reports. The system administrator can change the time and date from the system programming mode. In addition, extension users can change the time and date from the User Programmable Features.

  • Page 380: User Programmable Feature

    Time and Date Other Related Features Features Battery Backup (page 38) The battery on the CPU PCB backs up the CPU Real Time Clock for 10-14 days. Station Message Detail Recording (page 328) Time and date appear on the SMDR report. IntraMail Features None Operation...

  • Page 381: Toll Restriction

    Toll Restriction Toll Restriction Description Use Toll Restriction to help you control the costs of outgoing long distance calls. For some common Toll Restriction examples, turn to page 356. Toll Restriction limits the numbers an extension user may dial. By allowing extensions to place only certain types of calls, the system administrator can control long distance costs.

  • Page 382: Toll Restriction Overview

    Toll Restriction The following chart summarizes these tables. Toll Restriction Tables Dialing Type Program Description Program 352x-1010-XXX / Local Lookup table that restricts 1010 + XXX Equal Access Dialing XXX (Equal Access Dialing) dialing. Can be set up as an allow or deny (page 844) table.

  • Page 383: Default Toll Restriction Configuration

    Toll Restriction When you dial: 1010 220 203 926 5400 ❥ Equal Access (1010 XXX) Dialing is controlled by the Equal Access codes entered in 352x-1010-XXX / Local XXX (Equal Access Dialing) (page 844). - The table entries have no affect on the less common 101X XXX Equal Access dialing. When you dial: 1 800 365 1928, 1 900 555 1212, 1 926 5400 ❥...
  • Page 384 Toll Restriction Programming Basic Setup To set up Toll Restriction Tables prior to programming: In 3501-01: Toll Restriction Country Type (page 839), set the Toll Restriction Country Type. - For systems installed in North America, you should select US Domestic ( 1 ). Assign a Toll Restriction level to an extension.

  • Page 385: Long Distance Dialing Restrictions

    Toll Restriction If no, in 352x-1010-XXX / Local XXX (Equal Access Dialing) (page 844) change the table to an allow table with no entries. This blocks all 1010 + XXX dialing. 1 + Long Distance Dialing Restrictions Do you want to allow 1 + NPA or 1 + NXX dialing? If yes, in 353x-1+XXX / TBL-A XXX (NPA/NXX Dialing 3-Digit Table) (page 846) set up the table.

  • Page 386: Some Common Toll Restriction Examples

    Toll Restriction Some Common Toll Restriction Examples Note that the following 4 examples can be simultaneously programmed in the same system – just don’t rein- itialize the Toll Restriction Tables in examples 2-4. Example 1: Allowing Only Local Calling Allow users to dial only 7-digit and 10-digit local numbers. All 1 + 7 digit, 1 + 10 digit, 0+, and Equal Access dialing is restricted.
  • Page 387 Toll Restriction Flash (page 177) When an extension user with Toll Restriction enabled flashes a line, the system enforces Toll Restric- tion on any digits the user dials from the new dial tone. For example, if an extension user cannot dial 203 926 5400 before they flash, they cannot dial 203 926 5400 after they flash.

  • Page 388: Transfer

    Transfer Transfer Description Send the outside call you are on to a co-worker. Transfer permits an extension user to send (i.e., extend) an active call to any other extension in the system, a Ring Group, UCD Group or voice mail. With Transfer, any extension user can quickly send a call to the desired co-worker.

  • Page 389: Interaction Between Call Forwarding, Extension Hunting, And Transfer Recall

    Transfer Interaction Between Call Forwarding, Extension Hunting, and Transfer Recall The following chart shows how the system handles Transfer Recall call routing when both Call Forwarding and Extension Hunting are enabled at the destination extension. Call Forwarding has priority over Exten- sion Hunting.
  • Page 390 Transfer Call Forwarding and Type 2 (Ring No Answer / Busy Line) Extension Hunting Call Forwarding and Type 3 (Ring No Answer / Busy All) Extension Hunting Destination Extension Forwarding Type Ring No Answer Busy In DND • Call rings destination for •...
  • Page 391 Transfer Call Forwarding and Type 4 (Busy Line) Extension Hunting Destination Extension Forwarding Type Ring No Answer Busy In DND • Call rings destination for • Call rings the forwarding destination for the 1603-01: Busy/No Answer the 1603-01: Transfer Transfer Recall Timer interval. Recall Timer interval.
  • Page 392 Transfer Programming Transfer Recall Does an unanswered Transfer ring an idle extension or Ring Group long enough before recalling the extension that initially transferred it? If yes, leave 1603-01: Transfer Recall Timer (page 675) at its current setting. If no, adjust 1603-01: Transfer Recall Timer (page 675) as required. Does an unanswered Transfer Camp-On to a busy destination extension long enough before recalling the extension that initially transferred it? For non-operator extensions:...
  • Page 393 Transfer Hotline Automatic Transfer When transferring, should the user be able to press Hotline (without first pressing TRANSFER) to Transfer the call? In 2102-01: Class of Service (page 724), check the extension’s Class of Service level. If yes, in 1401-13: Hotline Automatic Transfer (page 632) enter If no, in 1401-13: Hotline Automatic Transfer (page 632) enter Other Related Features Features...
  • Page 394 Transfer Reverse Voice Over (page 289) While idle, an extension user can use their Reverse Voice Over key to Transfer calls. Station Message Detail Recording (page 328) The system assigns the SMDR record to the last extension on the call. For example, if extension 306 answers the call, talks for 20 minutes, and then Transfers the call to extension 302, extension 302 “owns”...
  • Page 395 Transfer Operation In these instructions: Using Transfer [Super Display Soft Key] [Keyset Soft Key] To Transfer your call: Do not hang up. Press TRANSFER Do one of the following. Dial your co-worker’s extension. • To Transfer your call directly to your co-worker’s mailbox, do this instead: - Press V-MAIL - Dial their extension number.
  • Page 396 Transfer In these instructions: Using Transfer [Super Display Soft Key] [Keyset Soft Key] To Transfer a call to your co-worker’s speakerphone (i.e., use Handsfree Transfer): Do one of the following. While on an outside call: • Press TRANSFER . • Dial you co-worker’s extension number. Press Hotline key for your co-worker.

  • Page 397: Unsupervised Conference

    Unsupervised Conference Unsupervised Conference Description Available. See Tandem Calls / Unsupervised Conference (page 341) for more. Features ◆ 367 DSX Software Manual...

  • Page 398: User Programmable Features

    User Programmable Features User Programmable Features Description Extension users can set up their telephones to meet their own unique requirements. User Programmable Features allow an extension user to dial mnemonics to customize the way certain features work on their telephone. With User Programmable Features, there is no need to rely on a System Administra- tor or Communications Manager to set up each phone.
  • Page 399 User Programmable Features User Programmable Features To program a feature, press and the feature’s code. For example, to enable incoming Paging, press and dial , then V P Y to hang up. By default, Call Forwarding Clear All, System Speed Dial, and Time and Date are only available to SPEAKER the attendant.
  • Page 400 User Programmable Features User Programmable Features To program a feature, press # and the feature’s code. For example, to enable incoming Paging, press # and dial V P Y , then to hang up. By default, Call Forwarding Clear All, System Speed Dial, and Time and Date are only available to SPEAKER the attendant.
  • Page 401 User Programmable Features Programming Assign an extension’s access level. In 2102-04: User Programming Access Level (page 725), assign an extensions access level (1-5). - Access level 5 has the most capability (see the tables above). Access level 1 has the least capability. - By default, extension 300 has its access level fixed at 5.

  • Page 402: Voice Mail

    Voice Mail Voice Mail Description Voice mail ends the frustration and cost of missed calls, inaccurate written messages and telephone tag, freeing up the company’s receptionists and secretaries for more production work. The system is fully compatible with IntraMail, UltraMail, and NVM-Series Voice Mail with Automated Attendant Systems.

  • Page 403: Personal Answering Machine Emulation

    Voice Mail Personal Answering Machine Emulation Refer to Call Screening (page 453). You may find that Call Screening better meets your requirements. A keyset user can have their idle extension emulate a personal answering machine. This lets voice mail screen their calls, just like their answering machine at home. If activated, the extension’s incoming calls route to the user’s Subscriber Mailbox.

  • Page 404: Call Forwarding Timers And Voice Mail

    Voice Mail Call Forwarding Timers and Voice Mail The following diagram shows how the system handles an outside call transferred to an extension that is for- warded to voice mail. Transferred Outside Call to Forwarded Extension Extension A transfers line to extension B, which is forwarded Busy/No Answer (type 2) to exten- sion C.

  • Page 405: Basic Installation

    Voice Mail Programming Basic Installation To install IntraMail: Turn the system off. Plug in the IntraMail CompactFlash card. - In DSX-40, the card plugs directly into the equipment cabinet. - In DSX-80/160, the card plugs into the CPU PCB. Normally, you should leave the following at their default settings: - 1312-01: Voice Mail Extension Number (page 624) ( 500-507 - 4101-02: Voice Mail Master Number (page 864) (...
  • Page 406 Voice Mail NVM-Series Station Port Assignments Port 1 Port 2 Port 3 Port 4 Secondary (1203) In 4101-01: Voice Mail Type (page 863), enter 4 (for external). Normally, you should leave the following at their default settings: - 1312-01: Voice Mail Extension Number (page 624) ( 500-507 ). - 4101-02: Voice Mail Master Number (page 864) ( 700 ).
  • Page 407 Voice Mail Automated Attendant Answering To set up the Automated Attendant to answer calls during the day: In 3112-01: Direct Termination in the Day (page 819), enter To control the day/night mode of lines terminated to voice mail during the day, set up a UCD night key on your extension or DSS Console.

  • Page 408: Message Center

    Voice Mail Do unanswered calls ring the overflow destination for the proper interval before diverting to Key Ring? If yes, leave 1601-02: DIL No Answer Timer (page 669) at its current setting. If no, adjust 1601-02: DIL No Answer Timer (page 669) as required. When all voice mail ports are busy, should the caller wait for an idle port or overflow to an alternate destination? To wait for an idle port:...
  • Page 409 Voice Mail Other Related Features Features Account Codes (page 14) • Voice mail callout features (such as Message Notification) may interact with Account Codes if the callout number contains # characters. Attendant Position (page 24) • STRF transfers to the attendant from the voice mail Automated Attendant flash the Operator Call key and the Ring Indicator lamp.
  • Page 410 Voice Mail Operation In these instructions: The Voice Mail Basics [Super Display Soft Key] [Keyset Soft Key] To call your mailbox: (Optional) Check the status of your mailbox. • On your display, is the number of new messages in your mailbox. V-Mail xx [VMxx] •...
  • Page 411 Voice Mail In these instructions: Transferring Calls to a Mailbox [Super Display Soft Key] [Keyset Soft Key] To Transfer your active call to a mailbox: Method A (Ring first, then Transfer) Press TRANSFER Dial the number of the mailbox to receive the Transfer. •...
  • Page 412 Voice Mail In these instructions: Using Conversation Record [Super Display Soft Key] [Keyset Soft Key] To record your active call in a mailbox: Do one of the following. Press a Record Feature Key on your extension or DSS Console. • The record key can be assigned to yours or a co-worker’s mailbox. •...

  • Page 413: User Programmable Features

    Voice Mail In these instructions: Using Answering Machine Emulation [Super Display Soft Key] [Keyset Soft Key] To activate or cancel Personal Answering Machine Emulation: • Refer to Call Screening (page 453). You may find that Call Screening better meets your requirements. Select the Call Forwarding options.
  • Page 414 Voice Mail Setting up a Message Center Key Feature Mnemonic Operation Access Level Voice Mail #KP (#57) + Press key you want to program + HOLD + Dial 24 + Enter mailbox number + HOLD + CONF + SPEAKER twice to exit. 384 ◆...

  • Page 415: Voice Over

    Voice Over Voice Over Description Get through to a co-worker busy on a handset call — without interrupting their call. Voice Over lets a user get through to a keyset extension user busy on a handset call. With Voice Over, the busy keyset extension user hears an alert tone followed by the voice of the interrupting party.
  • Page 416 Voice Over Other Related Features Features Attendant Position (page 24) An operator cannot receive a Voice Over from a co-worker since their extension is never busy to Inter- com callers. Call Coverage Keys (page 40) An extension can Voice Over after calling a co-worker by pressing their Call Coverage key. Conference (page 89) An extension user cannot Voice Over to a co-worker busy on a Conference call.
  • Page 417 Voice Over Operation In these instructions: Using Voice Over [Super Display Soft Key] [Keyset Soft Key] To initiate a Voice Over to a busy extension: Listen for busy/ring tone. • If you don’t hear busy ring, you cannot Voice Over. Do one of the following.

  • Page 418: Volume, Brightness, And Contrast Controls

    Volume, Brightness, and Contrast Controls Volume, Brightness, and Contrast Controls Description Easily adjust the volume of ringing, Paging, and other features. A keyset user can press Volume Up and Volume Down to interactively adjust the volume of the following features while they are active: Intercom handset calls ❥...
  • Page 419 Volume, Brightness, and Contrast Controls Programming Volume Settings Should the system remember the volume settings you set for outside calls? If yes, in 2111-07: Retain Line Volume Setting (page 732) enter If no, in 2111-07: Retain Line Volume Setting (page 732) enter Display Backlight and Key Pad Illumination Controls Set up the telephone display backlight and key pad illumination controls.
  • Page 420 Volume, Brightness, and Contrast Controls Operation In these instructions: Adjusting your Telephone’s Volume [Super Display Soft Key] [Keyset Soft Key] To interactively adjust the volume while a feature is active: While the feature is active, press Volume Up and Volume Down . •...
  • Page 421 Volume, Brightness, and Contrast Controls In these instructions: Adjusting your Telephone’s Volume [Super Display Soft Key] [Keyset Soft Key] To set up the display brightness, contrast control, and dial pad illummination presets: [Menu + Display] Select the display preset mode. [Menu + MORE (2 or 3 times) + Dsply] Do one of the following.

  • Page 422: Walking Class Of Service

    Walking Class of Service Walking Class of Service Description An extension user can temporarily use their Toll Restriction and Class of Service options at a co-worker’s phone. Walking Class of Service allows an extension user to temporarily implement their Toll Restriction and Class of Service settings at a co-worker’s keyset.
  • Page 423 Walking Class of Service Other Related Features Features Extension Locking (page 166) Extension Locking and Walking Class of Service share the same PIN code. Single Line Telephones (page 305) Walking Class of Service is not available to single line telephone users. Station Message Detail Recording (page 328) When an extension user implements Walking Class of Service and places an outside call, the system assigns the SMDR record to the users’s extension.
  • Page 424 Walking Class of Service In these instructions: Entering or Changing Your PIN Number [Super Display Soft Key] [Keyset Soft Key] When you see NEW PIN ACCEPTED [Exit] [Exit] To change your PIN number (if you already have one assigned): Press INTERCOM and dial ##6 . When you see ENTER PIN CODE: •...

  • Page 425: Intramail Features

    IntraMail Features Introduction Introduction How To Use This Chapter If you are not familiar with the IntraMail features, review the IntraMail Feature Glossary on page 402. This chapter provides detailed information on the IntraMail features. Similar to the Features chapter, the IntraMail features in this chapter are in alphabetical order, like a dictionary.

  • Page 426: Start-Up Programming

    Start-Up Programming Start-Up Programming Start-Up IntraMail Programming Enable the mailboxes for all installed extensions (not for Built-In Automated Attendant). Add additional IntraMail mailboxes as required. - In 2141-01: Station Mailbox Type (page 766), enter 1 . This enables a Subscriber Mailbox for the extension.
  • Page 427 Start-Up Programming Review this additional programming (not for Built-In Automated Attendant). Normally, you should leave the following programs at their default settings: - 1312-01: Voice Mail Extension Number (page 624) ( 500-507 - 4101-02: Voice Mail Master Number (page 864) ( - 4111-01: Voice Mail Port Name (page 865) ( VM PORT # - 4112-02: Operator’s Extension (page 868) (...

  • Page 428: Specifications

    Specifications Specifications Specifications Built-In Automated Attendant Capacities Mailboxes Routing Mailboxes: ....8 Call Routing: ..8 Announcement: . . . 0 Subscriber:.

  • Page 429: Application Examples

    Application Examples Application Examples Examples of Some Common Applications The examples below show some common applications. The chart in the beginning of each example shows: How the relevant programmable options work by default. ❥ The Application Summary, which provides the basic steps you need to take to set up the application. ❥...
  • Page 430 Application Examples Example 2: Provide Unique Day and Night Dialing Options for Callers Default Dial Action Table Options (This application does not apply to the Built-In Automated Attendant.) • All Call Routing Mailboxes (1-8 by default) use Dial Action Table 1 •...
  • Page 431 Application Examples Example 3: Overflow to IntraMail in the Day, Answer in Night Mode Default Ringing and Overflow Setup • Lines 1-12 ring on line keys 1-12 for extensions 300-315. • All other extensions are lamp only for lines 1-12. •...

  • Page 432: Intramail Feature Glossary

    IntraMail Feature Glossary IntraMail Feature Glossary Name Description Usage • See Security Code in this glossary. Voice Mail Administrator Security Code Control • See Next Call Routing Mailbox in this Glossary. Voice Mail Alternate Next Call Routing Mailbox Mailbox that allows a prerecorded greeting to play to callers. Automated Attendant Announcement Mailbox •...
  • Page 433 IntraMail Feature Glossary Name Description Usage While on an outside call, an extension user can transfer Voice Mail Automated Attendant Transfer their call to the Automated Attendant so the caller can use the Automated Attendant dialing options. • See Automated Attendant Transfer (page 441) for more.
  • Page 434 IntraMail Feature Glossary Name Description Usage Allows an extension user to record their active call as a mes- Voice Mail Conversation Record sage in their mailbox. IntraMail will broadcast a beep and a voice prompt to the callers as Conversation Record begins. •...
  • Page 435 IntraMail Feature Glossary Name Description Usage The Automated Attendant can provide outside callers with Automated Attendant Flexible Call Routing a wide variety of dialing (routing) options. There are 3 components to Flexible Call Routing. • Answer Table Determines how the Automated Attendant answers out- side calls on each Voice Mail port, according to the time of the day and day of the week that the call is ringing.
  • Page 436 IntraMail Feature Glossary Name Description Usage An Automated Attendant option that immediately hangs Automated Attendant Hang Up up the outside call. • See Hang Up (page 506) for more. Help • See Getting Recorded Help in this glossary. Voice Mail •...
  • Page 437 IntraMail Feature Glossary Name Description Usage Mailbox Transfer • See Transfer to a Mailbox in this glossary. Voice Mail The IntraMail options available to an extension user when Voice Mail Main Menu they log onto their mailbox. • See Main Menu (page 523) for more. A Subscriber Mailbox user can listen to a voice message Voice Mail Make Call...
  • Page 438 IntraMail Feature Glossary Name Description Usage IntraMail will save a mailbox’s new or saved messages for Voice Mail Message Retention the Message Retention interval, and then delete them. • See Message Retention (page 547) for more. Message Send • See Record and Send a Message in this glossary. Voice Mail Sets how many messages a mailbox can store.
  • Page 439 IntraMail Feature Glossary Name Description Usage • Pre-recorded voice prompts guide the user through the Voice Mail Recorded Help IntraMail features. Recording a Conversation • See Conversation Record in this glossary. Voice Mail Recording a Message • See Record and Send a Message in this glossary. Voice Mail Recording Conversation Beep •...
  • Page 440 IntraMail Feature Glossary Name Description Usage An Automated Attendant caller can press a single key to Automated Attendant Single Digit Dialing route to an extension, route to another destination, or use an IntraMail feature. • See Single Digit Dialing (page 572) for more. The mailbox type normally used for telephone system Voice Mail Subscriber Mailbox...
  • Page 441 IntraMail Feature Glossary Name Description Usage A dialpad digit for which the Automated Attendant has no Automated Attendant Undefined Routing routing defined. When an Automated Attendant caller dials a digit for which there is no routing assigned, Intra- Mail plays a brief error message and then repeats the dial- ing options.

  • Page 442: Announcement Mailbox

    Announcement Mailbox Announcement Mailbox Description Play a pre-recorded announcement to callers. An Announcement Mailbox plays a pre-recorded announcement to Automated Attendant callers without providing dialing options. The Announcement Mailbox is typically set up to provide information to callers (such as company directions) and then route back to the Automated Attendant. For example: The Automated Attendant instructs the caller to dial a digit (e.g., 1) for company directions.
  • Page 443 Announcement Mailbox Direct Announcement Mailbox Routing (If the outside caller routes directly to the Announcement Mailbox) 4223-03: Next Call 4223-01: Repeat 4223-02-Hang Up Action Routing Mailbox Count After Undefined 0 (No repeats) Yes or No • If the caller doesn’t dial, after the announcement IntraMail hangs up.
  • Page 444 Announcement Mailbox (Page 1 of 2) Routed Announcement Mailbox Routing (If the outside caller routes to the Announcement Mailbox from a Call Routing Mailbox) 4223-03: Next Call 4223-01: Repeat 4223-02-Hang Up Action Routing Mailbox Count After Undefined 0 (No repeats) •...
  • Page 445 Announcement Mailbox (Page 2 of 2) Routed Announcement Mailbox Routing (If the outside caller routes to the Announcement Mailbox from a Call Routing Mailbox) 4223-03: Next Call 4223-01: Repeat 4223-02-Hang Up Action Routing Mailbox Count After 1-16 (valid Call x (x number of •...
  • Page 446 Announcement Mailbox Other Related Features Features None IntraMail Features Automated Attendant (page 433) The Automated Attendant can route callers to an Announcement Mailbox. Call Routing Mailbox (page 450) A Call Routing Mailbox (and the associated Dial Action Table) provides dialing options to Automated Attendant callers.

  • Page 447: Announcement Message

    Announcement Message Announcement Message Description This is the message that the System Administrator records for an Announcement Mailbox. The Announcement Message is the voice message that the System Administrator records for a specific Announcement Mailbox. See Announcement Mailbox (page 412) for more. Programming See Announcement Mailbox (page 412).

  • Page 448: Answer Schedule Override

    Answer Schedule Override Answer Schedule Override Description Enables an alternate greeting and alternate dialing options for callers. Answer Schedule Override provides alternate answering for Automated Attendant calls. When enabled, Answer Schedule Override sends calls to the specified Override Mailbox. The Override Mailbox can be an Announcement, Call Routing, or Subscriber mailbox.
  • Page 449 Answer Schedule Override The Override Mailbox can be a Subscriber Mailbox. System Administrator (page 576) Optionally enable Answer Schedule Override from the System Administrator Mailbox. Operation Enabling Answer Schedule Override [Super Display Soft Key] - [Keyset Soft Key] Log onto System Administrator’s Mailbox. Access System Administrator options.

  • Page 450: Answer Tables

    Answer Tables Answer Tables Description Determines how the Automated Attendant answers outside calls on each line, according to the time of the day and day of the week that the call is ringing. The Answer Table determines how the Automated Attendant answers outside calls on each line, according to the time of the day and day of the week that the call is ringing.

  • Page 451: The Default Mailbox And Routing Hierarchy

    Answer Tables The Default Mailbox and Routing Hierarchy The Default Mailbox provides routing for an Answer Table during periods when a schedule is not in effect. By default, for example, Answer Table 1 Schedule 1 is active Monday through Friday from 8:30 AM to 5:00 PM.
  • Page 452 Answer Tables Default Setting • All lines are assigned to Answer Table 1. • All outside lines are set to Key Ring during the day and at night. Programming Basic Setup Assign Answer Tables to outside lines. In 3131-02: IntraMail Answer Table Assignment (page 828), assign an Answer Table (1-8) to each line that the Automated Attendant should answer.
  • Page 453 Answer Tables Setting Up a Type 1 (Day of Week) Schedule Assign the schedule type and routing mailbox. In 4212-[01-10]: Schedule Type (page 882), enter In 4212-[01-10]: Routing Mailbox Number (page 883), select the Routing Mailbox (1-16) that will answer calls when this Schedule Entry is active. - You can optionally assign a Subscriber Mailbox for this option.
  • Page 454 Answer Tables Setting Up a Type 3 (Date) Schedule Assign the schedule type and routing mailbox. In 4212-[01-10]: Schedule Type (page 882), enter 3. In 4212-[01-10]: Routing Mailbox Number (page 883), select the Routing Mailbox (1-16) that will answer calls when this Schedule Entry is active. - You can optionally assign a Subscriber Mailbox for this option.

  • Page 455: Answering Machine Emulation

    Answering Machine Emulation Answering Machine Emulation Description A keyset on the connected telephone system can work like a home answering machine. A user’s keyset can work like a home answering machine. This lets IntraMail screen their calls, just like their answering machine at home.
  • Page 456 Answering Machine Emulation In these instructions: Using Personal Answering Machine Emulation [Super Display Soft Key] [Keyset Soft Key] When Personal Answering Machine Emulation broadcasts your caller’s voice: Do one of the following. Do nothing to have the caller’s message automatically recorded in your mailbox. Press SPEAKER or lift the handset to intercept the call.

  • Page 457: Auto Attendant Do Not Disturb

    Auto Attendant Do Not Disturb Auto Attendant Do Not Disturb Description Auto Attendant Do Not Disturb sends Automated Attendant calls directly to an extension user’s mailbox. Their phone will not ring for calls from the Automated Attendant. When a subscriber enables Auto Attendant Do Not Disturb, Automated Attendant calls to their extension go directly to their mailbox.
  • Page 458 Auto Attendant Do Not Disturb Operation Recording a Multiple Greeting and Setting Up Auto Attendant Do Not Disturb [Super Display Soft Key] - [Keyset Soft Key] Log onto Subscriber Mailbox. Access the Mailbox Greeting options. [Greeting] - [Greet] IntraMail does the following: •...

  • Page 459: Auto Erase Or Save

    Auto Erase or Save Auto Erase or Save Description When a m ailbox user completely listens to a new message and then exits their mailbox, IntraMail will either save or erase the message. When a mailbox user completely listens to a new message and then exits their mailbox, IntraMail will either automatically save or erase the message.
  • Page 460 Auto Erase or Save Other Related Features Operation 430 ◆ IntraMail Features DSX Software Manual...

  • Page 461: Auto Time Stamp

    Auto Time Stamp Auto Time Stamp Description Automatically hear the time and date a message was left. After a Subscriber Mailbox user listens to a message, IntraMail can optionally announce the time and date the message was left. The Subscriber can enable Auto Time Stamp from their mailbox, or you can optionally enable it from system programming.
  • Page 462 Auto Time Stamp Operation Turning Auto Time Stamp On or Off [Super Display Soft Key] - [Keyset Soft Key] Log onto Subscriber Mailbox. Access the Mailbox Options Menu. (67) [MBOX Options] - [N/A] Access Auto Time Stamp. (28) [Time Stamp] - [Time] IntraMail plays a summary of your Auto Time Stamp setting.

  • Page 463: Automated Attendant

    Automated Attendant Automated Attendant Description Automatically answers the telephone system’s incoming calls, plays an Instruction Menu message, and provides dialing options to callers. For a built-in call answering capability when IntraMail is not installed, see Automated Attendant, Built-In (page 433) The Automated Attendant answers outside calls on each line, according to the time of the day and day of the week that the call is ringing.

  • Page 464: Upgrading From The Built-In Automated Attendant

    Automated Attendant Upgrading from the Built-In Automated Attendant To upgrade to IntraMail from the Built-In Automated Attendant: Plug the IntraMail CompactFlash card into the system. - See your system’s Hardware Manual for more. Reset the system. IntraMail automatically installs. Rerecord your Instruction Menu Messages. - Your Answer Schedule and Dial Action Table programming remain intact.
  • Page 465 Automated Attendant See Dial Action Table (page 465) for more. Other Related Features Features None IntraMail Features Answer Tables (page 420) Determines how the Automated Attendant answers outside calls on each line. Call Routing Mailbox (page 450) The mailbox associated with an Answer Table that specifies the dialing options (Dial Action Table) and Instruction Menu that announcements are available to Automated Attendant callers.

  • Page 466: Automated Attendant, Built-In

    Automated Attendant, Built-In Automated Attendant, Built-In Description Provides built-in call answering capability when IntraMail is not installed. For the full-featured IntraMail Automated Attendant that automatically answers incoming calls, plays an Instruction Menu message, and provides dialing options to callers, see Automated Attendant (page 433) .

  • Page 467: Upgrading From The Built-In Automated Attendant

    Automated Attendant, Built-In DIL to Voice Mail 3112-01: Direct Termination (Day) ● 3112-04: Direct Termination (Night) Master (700) ● Automated Attendant Answering (Default) Lines Route to 3131-02: Answer Table ● Answer Table 1 Answer Table 1 421x-Answer Table ● Dial Action Table 1 Dialing Options Dial an extension number, or Calls always route to Call Routing Mailbox 001...
  • Page 468 Automated Attendant, Built-In Programming Enable the Built-In Automated Attendant. In 4101-01: Voice Mail Type (page 863), enter 1 . (Optional) If you want to upgrade the Built-In Automated Attendant to IntraMail: - Plug in the IntraMail CompactFlash Card. - Reset the system. - All system programming (Answer Tables, Dial Action Tables, etc.) will be retained.
  • Page 469 Automated Attendant, Built-In Set up the Dial Action Tables. See Dial Action Table (page 465) for more. Set the maximum message length for Automated Attendant callers leaving a message in a mailbox. Set the maximum message length in 4201-02: Incoming Message Length (page 872). - This sets the maximum message length ( 1-4095 seconds) for outside Automated Attendant callers...
  • Page 470 Automated Attendant, Built-In Operation Using the Built-In Automated Attendant For the outside caller: After Automated Attendant answers, the voice prompts will instruct you on which digits to dial. Recording an Automated Attendant Instruction Menu (Attendant Greeting) Message [Super Display Soft Key] - [Keyset Soft Key] Access the Attendant Greeting options.

  • Page 471: Automated Attendant Transfer

    Automated Attendant Transfer Automated Attendant Transfer Description While on an outside call, an extension user can transfer their call to the Automated Attendant for additional dialing options. An extension user can transfer their outside call to the Automated Attendant so the outside caller can use the Automated Attendant dialing options.

  • Page 472: Automatic Routing For Rotary Dial Callers

    Automatic Routing for Rotary Dial Callers Automatic Routing for Rotary Dial Callers Description Automatically route Automated Attendant callers that don’t dial any digits to a specified option. If an Automated Attendant caller doesn’t dial any digits, IntraMail will automatically route them to a speci- fied option (such as the operator or a mailbox).

  • Page 473: Bilingual Voice Prompts

    Bilingual Voice Prompts Bilingual Voice Prompts Description Provides IntraMail voice prompts in one of two active languages. Bilingual Voice Prompts provides IntraMail voice prompts in one of two active languages (primary and sec- ondary). These language choices are available to Routing Mailboxes, outside lines, Station Mailboxes, and Group Mailboxes as follows: Routing Mailbox ❥...
  • Page 474 Bilingual Voice Prompts If an outside call is answered by a Routing Mailbox (e.g., Priority 1 Routing Mailbox when Automated Attendant answers), the caller uses the Routing Mailbox language for the duration of the call. When an outside call is answered by voice mail (e.g., when a DIL to an extension hunts to that extension’s mailbox), Line Priority 2...
  • Page 475 Bilingual Voice Prompts Select the prompt language for Call Routing Mailboxes. In 4221-02: Routing Mailbox Voice Prompt Language (page 890), select the prompt language used by calls answered or routed to the Routing Mailbox. The options are: for Primary Language for Secondary Language Optionally allow an Automated Attendant caller to dial a digit to switch languages.
  • Page 476 Bilingual Voice Prompts Other Related Features Features Transfer (page 358) Transferred outside calls use the language setting of the line. IntraMail Features Log Onto Voice Mail (page 515) When doing a Remote Logon through the Automated Attendant, the caller uses the destination mail- box language setting (not the language of the Routing Mailbox that answered the call).

  • Page 477: Call Forward To A Mailbox

    Call Forward to a Mailbox Call Forward to a Mailbox Description An extension user can forward their calls to their mailbox. A subscriber can easily forward calls to their Subscriber Mailbox. Instead of dialing an extension as the for- warding destination, the user just presses their key instead.
  • Page 478 Call Forward to a Mailbox Conditions • None Default Setting • Call Forwarding is allowed, but not set up for any extensions. • Ring No Answer Call Forward occurs after 10 seconds. Programming Set how long an unanswered call will ring before forwarding. In 1601-03: Call Forward No Answer Timer (page 670), program how long an unanswered call will ring before forwarding.
  • Page 479 Call Forward to a Mailbox Operation In these instructions: Activating or Canceling Call Forward to your Mailbox [Super Display Soft Key] [Keyset Soft Key] To activate Call Forwarding: Select the Call Forwarding options. [Menu + Call Forward] Alternately do one of the following: [Menu + Cfwd] •...

  • Page 480: Call Routing Mailbox

    Call Routing Mailbox Call Routing Mailbox Description The mailbox associated with an Answer Table that specifies the dialing options and announcements for Automated Attendant callers. The Call Routing Mailbox, associated with an Answer Table, specifies which dialing options (Dial Action Table) and announcements are available to Automated Attendant callers.
  • Page 481 Call Routing Mailbox Conditions • None Default Setting • See Description above. Programming Set up the Call Routing Mailbox. In 4221-01: Routing Mailbox Type (page 890), enter - Select the Routing Mailbox ( 1-16 ) you want to program. - By default, Call Routing Mailboxes are To record an Instruction Menu message for the Call Routing Mailbox: See Operation below.
  • Page 482 Call Routing Mailbox System Administrator (page 576) The System Administrator can record the Instruction Menu for a Call Routing Mailbox. See Opera- tion below. Operation Recording an Instruction Menu for a Call Routing Mailbox [Super Display Soft Key] - [Keyset Soft Key] Log onto System Administrator’s mailbox.

  • Page 483: Call Screening

    Call Screening Call Screening Description Users can screen (listen to) voice mail messages as they are being left in their mailbox. Call Screening allows a display keyset extension user to listen to (screen) a voice mail message as it is being left in their mailbox.
  • Page 484 Call Screening Operation In these instructions: Manual Call Screening Operation [Super Display Soft Key] [Keyset Soft Key] • When Automatic Call Screening is off, you hear a single beep and V-MAIL flashes fast while IntraMail records your caller’s message. Your display automatically changes to show the Call Screening soft key options. •...
  • Page 485 Call Screening In these instructions: Automatic Call Screening Operation [Super Display Soft Key] [Keyset Soft Key] • When Automatic Call Screening is on, your idle telephone automatically goes into the screen mode while your caller leaves a message. • Call Screening is only available while your telephone is idle. To turn Automatic Call Screening on or off: Enable or disable Automatic Call Screening.

  • Page 486: Caller Id And Voice Mail

    Caller ID and Voice Mail Caller ID and Voice Mail Description A telephone company service that provides a caller’s number and optional name. Caller ID is a telephone company service that provides an extension with a caller’s number and optional name.
  • Page 487 Caller ID and Voice Mail Other Related Features Features Caller ID (page 63) and Caller ID Logging (page 68) Review these features for additional information. IntraMail Features Make Call (page 525) An extension user can listen to a voice message and dial a code to return the call without knowing the caller’s phone number.

  • Page 488: Caller Id With Return Call

    Caller ID with Return Call Caller ID with Return Call Description Available. See Make Call (page 525) for more. 458 ◆ IntraMail Features DSX Software Manual...

  • Page 489: Calling The Automated Attendant

    Calling the Automated Attendant Calling the Automated Attendant Description Outside callers can return to the Automated Attendant for additional dialing options. Automated Attendant callers can use various IntraMail features and then return to the Automated Attendant for additional dialing options. This lets the caller dial other extensions, leave messages for co-workers, or use other Automated Attendant features.

  • Page 490: Centrex Transfer

    Centrex Transfer Centrex Transfer Description The Automated Attendant can transfer a caller from a Centrex line to an outside number using the features of that Centrex line. Centrex Transfer is a Dial Action Table option that can transfer an Automated Attendant call from a Centrex line to an outside number using the features of that Centrex line.
  • Page 491 Centrex Transfer Set the Flash and pause timers for compatibility with the connected Centrex lines. Set the Flash timer for compatibility with the connected Centrex lines. - In 1612-04: PBX/Centrex Flash Timer (page 686), set the timer for compatibility with the con- nected Centrex service.

  • Page 492: Conversation Record

    Conversation Record Conversation Record Description Allows an extension user to record their active call as a message in their mailbox. Conversation Record allows a subscriber to record their active call as a new message in their mailbox, which they can review later on. Conversation Record can be helpful when an extension user is on a call that involves a lot of detail (such as a technical discussion or extensive directions).
  • Page 493 Conversation Record Enable the Conversation Record Beep and Warning. In 2143-05: Recording Conversation Beep (page 771), enter - If enabled, all parties on a call being recorded will hear the voice prompt Recording followed by a beep when the extension user initiates Conversation Record. If disabled, the voice prompt and beep will not occur.

  • Page 494: User Programmable Feature

    Conversation Record User Programmable Feature Setting up a Conversation Record Key Feature Mnemonic Operation Access Level #KP (#57) Voice Mail + Press key you want to program + HOLD + Dial 17 + Enter mailbox number or 0 for your own mailbox + HOLD + SPEAKER twice to exit.

  • Page 495: Dial Action Table

    Dial Action Table Dial Action Table Description Defines the dialing options for Automated Attendant callers. The Dial Action Table defines the dialing options for the Call Routing Mailbox chosen by the active Answer Table, which in turn provides those dialing options to Automated Attendant callers. IntraMail provides 16 Dial Action Tables.
  • Page 496 Dial Action Table Dial Action Table Options The following table summarizes the Dial Action Table dial (key) actions and their associated features. Dial Action Table Key Action Summary Action Description Feature Reference For more, see: Screened Transfer (1) Screened Transfer (page 567) Page 905 STRF Allows an Automated Attendant caller to place...
  • Page 497 Dial Action Table Programming Assign a Dial Action Table to each active Call Routing Mailbox. In 4222-01: Dial Action Table (page 891), assign a Dial Action Table ( ) to each active Call Routing Mailbox. Customize the Dial Action Table options. In 4231-Digit Assignment (page 901), customize the Dial Action Table digit assignments as required.
  • Page 498 Dial Action Table To change the amount of time Automated Attendant callers have to dial options: See Automated Attendant (page 433) for more. In 4222-02: Time Limit for Dialing Commands (page 891), enter the timeout duration ( 0 - 99 seconds). - By default, Automated Attendant callers have 5 seconds to dial commands.

  • Page 499: Directory Dialing

    Directory Dialing Directory Dialing Description An Automated Attendant caller to reach an extension by dialing the first few letters in the extension user’s name. Directory Dialing allows an Automated Attendant caller to reach an extension by dialing the first few letters in the extension user’s name.
  • Page 500 Directory Dialing To record a Directory Dialing Message: See Operation below. - The Directory Dialing Message is the Instruction Menu for the Routing Mailbox programmed as a Directory Dialing Mailbox. - By default (without a custom message recorded), the Directory Dialing Message is, “Please enter one or more letters of the person’s name, then press the pound key.”...
  • Page 501 Directory Dialing Additional Options Should Directory Dialing Mailbox be able to detect and route incoming faxes? In yes: - In 4224-08: Fax Detection (page 899), enter - This allows the Directory Dialing Mailbox to detect fax CNG tone. - In 4224-09: Fax Transfer Extension (page 900), enter the extension to which the Directory Dialing Mailbox should route the fax.
  • Page 502 Directory Dialing Operation Recording a Directory Dialing Message [Super Display Soft Key] - [Keyset Soft Key] Log onto System Administrator’s mailbox. Access System Administrator options. (72) [System Admin] - [N/A] Select Instruction Menus. [Instruction] - [Instr] Enter the Directory Dialing Mailbox number. Listen to the current Directory Dialing Message (if any).

  • Page 503: Dialing Options Available While Entering A Name

    Directory Dialing Dialing Options Available while Entering a Name The following table shows the dialing options available to the caller while they are entering a name into a Directory Dialing Mailbox. By default, the caller can dial the digs 2-9 to enter the name or dial # to return to the Automated Attendant. ❥...

  • Page 504: Dialing Options Available When More Than One Employee Has The Entered Name

    Directory Dialing Dialing Options Available when more than one Employee has the Entered Name If the name the caller enters is used by more than one employee, IntraMail lets the caller select the employee to which they want to talk. The caller can dial 1, 2 or 3 to select the employee from the first three name matches, or dial 4 to hear additional name matches.

  • Page 505: Directory Dialing Mailbox

    Directory Dialing Mailbox Directory Dialing Mailbox Description The mailbox type required for Directory Dialing. A Directory Dialing Mailbox is the Routing Mailbox type required to implement Directory Dialing. See Directory Dialing (page 469) for more on how to set up a Directory Dialing Mailbox. Conditions •...

  • Page 506: Erasing All Messages

    Erasing All Messages Erasing All Messages Description Lets the System Administrator delete mailbox messages system-wide. The System Administrator can delete all messages in a Subscriber Mailbox. Erasing All Messages is an administrator’s maintenance tool. The administrator may need to use this tool if an employee has left the company or has an excessive number of messages stored in their mailbox.

  • Page 507: Exiting A Mailbox

    Exiting a Mailbox Exiting a Mailbox Description Exit your mailbox by dialing a code or by hanging up. A Subscriber Mailbox user can exit their mailbox by dialing a code or by hanging up. After exiting, the sub- scriber can use their extension for normal call processing. Conditions •...

  • Page 508: Extension Hunting To Voice Mail

    Extension Hunting to Voice Mail Extension Hunting to Voice Mail Description Automatically sends unanswered calls to an extension’s mailbox. Extension Hunting to Voice Mail automatically sends calls to an extension’s mailbox without the user having to set up Call Forwarding. For example, Extension Hunting to Voice Mail can send unanswered transferred calls to an extension’s mailbox rather than recalling the transferring party.

  • Page 509: Extension Hunting To Voice Mail Routing Charts

    Extension Hunting to Voice Mail Extension Hunting to Voice Mail Routing Charts The following charts show in detail how each type of hunting handles incoming calls. Ring No Answer Line (Type 1) Hunting to Voice Mail Routing Chart Call Type Extension Idle Extension Busy Extension in DND...
  • Page 510 Extension Hunting to Voice Mail Ring No Answer / Busy All (Type 3) Hunting to Voice Mail Routing Chart Call Type Extension Idle Extension Busy Extension in DND Ringing Intercom call rings Call goes immediately to mailbox. Intercom for 1601-03: Call Forward No Answer Timer (page 670) interval then routes to mailbox.
  • Page 511 Extension Hunting to Voice Mail Programming Set up the hunt type and destination for Type 1 hunting. In 2115-01: Hunt Type (page 746), enter: for Ring No Answer Line. for Ring No Answer/Busy Line. for Ring No Answer/Busy All. for Busy Line. - Refer to Extension Hunting (page 154) for more.
  • Page 512 Extension Hunting to Voice Mail Other Related Features Features None IntraMail Features Call Forward to a Mailbox (page 447) A subscriber can forward calls to their mailbox calls don’t go unanswered when they are unavailable. Voice Mail Overflow (page 590) The telephone system can automatically reroute unanswered outside calls to the IntraMail Automated Attendant.

  • Page 513: External Transfer

    External Transfer External Transfer Description An Automated Attendant caller can automatically route to an outside telephone number. External Transfer allows an Automated Attendant caller to automatically route to an outside telephone num- ber. To set this up, assign a Dial Action Table action as a UTRF to a System Speed Dial bin (e.g., #201 + Pause for system bin 201).
  • Page 514 External Transfer Other Related Features Features None IntraMail Features Centrex Transfer (page 460) Centrex Transfer allows the Automated Attendant to transfer a caller over a Centrex line using the fea- tures of that Centrex line. Dial Action Table (page 465) External Transfer uses the active Dial Action Table to route an Automated Attendant caller to an out- side telephone number.

  • Page 515: Fax Detection

    Fax Detection Fax Detection Description Automatically transfer incoming fax calls to a fax machine. The Automated Attendant can detect incoming fax calls and transfer them to a fax machine. With Fax Detec- tion enabled, after the Automated Attendant answers a call it listens for incoming fax CNG tone. If it detects the tone, it does an unscreened transfer of the call to the specified company fax machine.

  • Page 516: Flexible Answering Schedules

    Flexible Answering Schedules Flexible Answering Schedules Description The Automated Attendant can answer outside calls with different announcements and dialing options, depending on the time of day and day of week. The Automated Attendant can answer outside calls with different announcements and dialing options, depending on the time of day and day of week.

  • Page 517: Flexible Call Routing

    Flexible Call Routing Flexible Call Routing Description Provides outside callers with a wide variety of dialing (routing) options. The Automated Attendant can provide outside callers with a wide variety of dialing (routing) options. You can customize the announcements and routing options to exactly meet the site requirements. Use Flexible Call Routing to eliminate or minimize the need for an operator or receptionist to handle outside calls.

  • Page 518: Flexible Mailbox Numbering Plan

    Flexible Mailbox Numbering Plan Flexible Mailbox Numbering Plan Description If telephone extension numbers are customized, set up IntraMail mailbox numbers to match. If the telephone system extension numbers are changed or swapped, IntraMail will automatically change the Subscriber Mailbox numbers to match. There is no extensive reprogramming required. After the swap, all of the subscriber’s messages and options are available at their new extension number.

  • Page 519: Forced Unscreened Transfer

    Forced Unscreened Transfer Forced Unscreened Transfer Description Automatically converts Automated Attendant Screened Transfers to Unscreened Transfers. A Subscriber Mailbox can optionally convert Automated Attendant Screened Transfers to Unscreened Transfers. Enable this option for a mailbox if the subscriber prefers to receive all calls sent by the Automated Attendant as Unscreened Transfers.

  • Page 520: Getting Recorded Help

    Getting Recorded Help Getting Recorded Help Description Request help from the IntraMail voice prompts. If a Subscriber Mailbox user dials an incorrect code or forgets what to dial while in their mailbox, they can request help from the IntraMail voice prompts. Recorded Help provides the user with a built-in, interactive user’s guide.

  • Page 521: Go To A Mailbox

    Go to a Mailbox Go to a Mailbox Description An Automated Attendant caller can dial a digit and route directly into a mailbox. An Automated Attendant caller can dial a digit to route to a Call Routing or Announcement Mailbox. This is called the Go To (GOTO) action.
  • Page 522 Go to a Mailbox Programming Assign a GOTO action to the active Dial Action Table. In 4231-Digit Assignment (page 901), assign a GOTO action to an available key. To have Automated Attendant callers dial a single digit to go to a Call Routing or Announcement Mailbox: In 4231-Digit Assignment (page 901), enter the mailbox number in the corresponding Routing option.

  • Page 523: Greeting

    Greeting Greeting Description A user can record a Greeting for their mailbox callers to hear. A Subscriber Mailbox user can record a personalized greeting for their mailbox. Caller’s to the user’s mail- box hear the prerecorded personalized greeting rather than a default message. The greeting can announce the subscriber’s name, provide a personal message (such as “Hello - I am on vacation this week”), or instruct the caller how to leave a message or use other mailbox options.
  • Page 524 Greeting Programming Set the maximum length of Subscriber Mailbox greetings. In 4201-01: Outgoing Message Length (page 871), set the maximum length of Subscriber Mailbox greet- ings ( 1 - 4095 seconds). Enabling Remote Greeting Program a LOGON action in the active Dial Action Table. In 4231-Digit Assignment (page 901), assign a LOGON action to an available key.
  • Page 525 Greeting Other Related Features Features None IntraMail Features Auto Attendant Do Not Disturb (page 427) Auto Attendant Do Not Disturb sends Automated Attendant calls directly to a subscriber’s mailbox. Their phone will not ring for calls from the Automated Attendant. Dial Action Table (page 465) The active Dial Action Table must have a LOGON action assigned to a key to enable Remote Greeting.
  • Page 526 Greeting Operation Recording a Multiple Greeting and Setting Up Auto Attendant Do Not Disturb [Super Display Soft Key] - [Keyset Soft Key] Log onto Subscriber Mailbox. Access the Mailbox Greeting options. [Greeting] - [Greet] IntraMail does the following: • Plays a summary of your current settings. •...

  • Page 527: Group Mailbox

    Group Mailbox Group Mailbox Description Subscribers in the same group can share a mailbox. Ring Group Mailbox Group (Shared) Mailbox A Group Mailbox is a Ring Group Mailbox shared by a group of co-workers. It is normally a Subscriber Mailbox. If a caller leaves a message at any extension within the group that shares the mailbox, the system stores the message in the shared Group Mailbox.
  • Page 528 Group Mailbox If the Group Mailbox user presses V-MAIL , they are asked to enter their mailbox number. After entering ❥ the number, they hear, “That mailbox does not exist.” An Automated Attendant caller attempting to leave a Quick Message or do a Remote Logon at an exten- ❥...

  • Page 529: Programming A Ring Group Mailbox

    Group Mailbox Programming Programming a Ring Group Mailbox Assign each extension you want to have in the Ring Group. In 2113-02: Ring Group (page 738), assign the extension to a Ring Group ( - The Ring Group assignment determines which Ring Group Mailbox the system uses as the exten- sion’s Group Mailbox.
  • Page 530 Group Mailbox - In 2213-02: Auto Erase/Save of Messages (page 784), set the auto save option for new messages ( 1 for Auto Save or 2 for Auto Erase). - Review Auto Erase or Save (page 429) for more. For Auto Time Stamp: - In 2213-03: Auto Time Stamp (page 785), enable ( Yes ) or disable ( No ) Auto Time Stamp for the Group Mailbox.

  • Page 531: Programming A Ucd Group Mailbox

    Group Mailbox Programming a UCD Group Mailbox Set up the UCD Group. Turn to Extension Hunting (page 154) for more on setting up UCD Hunting. For the UCD Group Mailbox that corresponds to the UCD Group master number, assign the mailbox type.
  • Page 532 Group Mailbox - Review Message Storage Limit (page 548) for more. For Message Waiting Lamp: - In 2313-04: Message Waiting Lamp (page 797), enable ( Yes ) Message Waiting lamping at the extensions sharing the Group Mailbox. - Review Message Waiting Lamp (page 549) for more. For Next Call Routing Mailbox: - In 2314-03: Dialing Option (page 798), enable ( Yes ) or disable ( No ) additional dialing options for Next Call Routing Mailbox calls.

  • Page 533: Guest Mailbox

    Guest Mailbox Guest Mailbox Description An outside party can have their own mailbox for receiving and sending messages. An outside party can have their own Guest Mailbox mailbox for receiving and sending messages. A Guest Mail- box is a Subscriber Mailbox that does not have an extension associated with it. A Guest Mailbox has many of the IntraMail features of a Subscriber Mailbox.
  • Page 534 Guest Mailbox • A Subscriber Mailbox user cannot use Make Call to return a call left by a Guest Mailbox, since the Guest Mailbox does not have an associated extension. Main Menu (page 523) The Main Menu provides assess to the features available to a Guest Mailbox. Message Listen Mode (page 534) Set the type of messages a guest will listen to when they dial L (5) after logging into their Guest Mailbox.
  • Page 535 Guest Mailbox Operation Accessing a Guest Mailbox To log onto a Guest Mailbox: Do one of the following. Press + Dial the IntraMail master number (e.g., 700) + Dial your mailbox number. INTERCOM • You can optionally press a Call Coverage key assigned to the IntraMail master number. Press the Message Center key for the Guest Mailbox.

  • Page 536: Hang Up

    Hang Up Hang Up Description An Automated Attendant option that immediately hangs up the outside call. Hang Up is an Automated Attendant option that immediately hangs up the outside call. When setting up a Dial Action Table, you may want to use Hang Up for unused actions (rather than the caller hearing the stan- dard error message).

  • Page 537: Instruction Menu

    Instruction Menu Instruction Menu Description Play an announcement to outside callers announcing the Automated Attendant dialing options. The Instruction Menu is the announcement that plays to Automated Attendant callers. Normally, the Instruc- tion Menu greets callers and provides them with the Automated Attendant dialing options. The Instruction Menu is associated with the active Call Routing Mailbox.
  • Page 538 Instruction Menu Operation Recording an Instruction Menu for a Call Routing Mailbox [Super Display Soft Key] - [Keyset Soft Key] Log onto System Administrator’s mailbox. Access System Administrator options. (72) [System Admin] - [N/A] Select Instruction Menus. [Instruction] - [Instr] Enter the Call Routing Mailbox number.

  • Page 539: Leaving A Message

    Leaving a Message Leaving a Message Description Leave a voice message in a mailbox from inside or outside the company. An extension user or outside caller can leave a voice message in a co-worker’s mailbox if that extension is busy, unanswered, or in Do Not Disturb. Leaving a voice message is a handy and efficient way to communi- cate with co-workers that avoids post-it notes, message pads, and unnecessary email.
  • Page 540 Leaving a Message Programming Set the maximum length of a message that can be left in a Subscriber Mailbox. In 4201-02: Incoming Message Length (page 872), enter the maximum length of a message a caller can leave in a Subscriber Mailbox ( 1 - 4095 seconds). Other Related Features Features None...
  • Page 541 Leaving a Message Operation Leaving a Message for a Co-worker To leave a message in the mailbox of an unanswered extension: Press V-MAIL Do one of the following. Leave message and hang up. Leave message and dial • Dialing sends the message and hangs up. To leave a message in a mailbox from outside the company: Do one of the following.

  • Page 542: Listening To Messages

    Listening to Messages Listening to Messages Description While or after listening to a message, an extension user has many message handling options from which to choose. While or after listening to a message, a Subscriber Mailbox user has many message handling options from which to choose.

  • Page 543: Handling Partially Reviewed Messages

    Listening to Messages Handling Partially Reviewed Messages When listening to multiple new messages when Auto Erase or Save is set to Save: Any message to which you partially listen is automatically saved. ❥ Any message to which you hang up during or do not listen is retained as a new message. ❥...
  • Page 544 Listening to Messages 22-Button and 34-Button Display Currently selected Message List Caller’s phone number Message number (in (requires Caller ID) selected Message List) Date message was left Time message was left Conditions • None Default Setting • Enabled Programming Set the Message Backup/Go Ahead Time. In 4201-03: Message Backup/Go Ahead Time (page 872), set the Backup/Go Ahead Time ( 1 - 60 seconds).

  • Page 545: Log Onto Voice Mail

    Log Onto Voice Mail Log Onto Voice Mail Description An extension user can press a key to log onto (access) their IntraMail mailbox. A subscriber can log onto their mailbox using a method that best suits their needs and location. While at their own phone, the subscriber just presses a single key to log onto their mailbox.
  • Page 546 Log Onto Voice Mail Programming Remotely Logging Onto a Mailbox Through the Automated Attendant Program a LOGON action in the active Dial Action Table. In 4231-Digit Assignment (page 901), assign a LOGON action to an available key. To log directly into a specific Subscriber Mailbox: In 4231-Digit Assignment (page 901), enter the mailbox number in the corresponding Routing option.
  • Page 547 Log Onto Voice Mail Guest Mailbox (page 503) A guest can log onto their mailbox by dialing the IntraMail master number followed by the Guest Mailbox number. Security Code (page 570) To avoid unauthorized access to their mailbox (particularly with Remote Log On), the user should enable their own unique Security Code.

  • Page 548: Mailbox Name

    Mailbox Name Mailbox Name Description A mailbox caller can hear the extension user’s prerecorded name instead of their mailbox number. A caller leaving a message in a Subscriber Mailbox can hear the mailbox’s prerecorded name instead of the mailbox number. The prerecorded Mailbox Name gives the subscriber’s mailbox that personal touch. Prior to leaving a message, caller’s will hear the name instead of the default “extension xxx”...
  • Page 549 Mailbox Name Recording Your Mailbox Name [Super Display Soft Key] - [Keyset Soft Key] Go back to the Mailbox Main Menu. [Exit] - [Exit] Plays Help message. Recording or Erasing Co-worker’s Names from a System Administrator’s Mailbox [Super Display Soft Key] - [Keyset Soft Key] Log onto System Administrator’s Mailbox.

  • Page 550: Mailbox Options Menu

    Mailbox Options Menu Mailbox Options Menu Description A Subscriber Mailbox sub-menu that provides access to the Auto Time Stamp, Mailbox Security Code Delete, and Message Notification features. The Mailbox Options Menu is a sub-menu of a subscriber’s Main Menu that provides access to the Auto Time Stamp, Mailbox Security Code Delete, and Message Notification features.
  • Page 551 Mailbox Options Menu Operation Accessing the Mailbox Options Menu [Super Display Soft Key] - [Keyset Soft Key] Log onto Subscriber Mailbox. Access the Mailbox Options Menu. (67) [MBOX Options] - [N/A] Plays Help message. IntraMail Features ◆ 521 DSX Software Manual...

  • Page 552: Mailbox Security Code Delete

    Mailbox Security Code Delete Mailbox Security Code Delete Description Allows the System Administrator to delete the security code for any mailbox. The System Administrator can delete the security code for any Subscriber Mailbox. This effectively unlocks the mailbox. If mailbox security is not necessary, deleting a mailbox’s security code speeds up mailbox logon. Without a security code, the subscriber just presses their V-MAIL key to immediately log onto their mailbox.

  • Page 553: Main Menu

    Main Menu Main Menu Description Provides options to an extension user when they log onto their mailbox. After a Subscriber Mailbox user logs into their mailbox, IntraMail provides them with the Main Menu of options. The Main Menu provides quick access to the most commonly used mailbox features in a central location.
  • Page 554 Main Menu Programming No additional programming required. Other Related Features See the Mailbox Main Menu chart above. Operation Accessing the Mailbox Main Menu [Super Display Soft Key] - [Keyset Soft Key] Log onto Subscriber Mailbox. • You automatically go to the mailbox Main Menu. Plays Help message which summarizes the Main Menu options.

  • Page 555: Make Call

    Make Call Make Call Description A Subscriber Mailbox user can dial MC to return a call without knowing their caller’s number. Make Call lets a Subscriber Mailbox user listen to a voice message and dial to return the call without knowing their caller’s phone number.
  • Page 556 Make Call To enable Make Call for remote logons (i.e., subscriber’s logging onto their mailbox through the Automated Attendant): In 3103-04: Tandem Calls (page 816), enter Yes to enable Tandem Calls. - Enable this option for either the inbound or outbound lines (or both). Other Related Features Features None...

  • Page 557: Master Mailbox

    Master Mailbox Master Mailbox Description See Group Mailbox (page 497). IntraMail Features ◆ 527 DSX Software Manual...

  • Page 558: Message Count Display

    Message Count Display Message Count Display Description The telephone display can show the number of new messages waiting in a user’s mailbox. The telephone display provides interactive status updates for the subscriber’s mailbox. The subscriber doesn’t have to call their mailbox and wait for the voice prompts to find out the number of new and saved messages in their mailbox.
  • Page 559 Message Count Display While Logged-in One new message waiting One saved message waiting in the Subscriber Mailbox in the Subscriber Mailbox Conditions • None Default Setting • Enabled Programming No additional programming required. Other Related Features Operation Operation is automatic. IntraMail Features ◆...

  • Page 560: Message Delete

    Message Delete Message Delete Description An extension user can delete any messages left in their mailbox. A Subscriber Mailbox user can delete any messages left in their mailbox. Message Delete lets the subscriber do their own mailbox maintenance. They can delete messages they no longer need and save messages that contain essential information.

  • Page 561: Message Forward

    Message Forward Message Forward Description A subscriber can forward a message in their mailbox to a co-worker. A Subscriber Mailbox user can forward a message in their mailbox to a co-worker. Forwarding is helpful when a subscriber receives a message with which a co-worker can assist them. Rather than sending a new message, the subscriber can just forward the message with which they need help.
  • Page 562 Message Forward Operation Forwarding a Message [Super Display Soft Key] - [Keyset Soft Key] Log onto Subscriber Mailbox. Access the Message Listen mode and listen to the message that you want to forward. [Listen] - [Lstn] Access the Message Forward Menu. (63) [Forward] - [N/A] Enter the number of the mailbox to which you want to forward the message.

  • Page 563: Message Length

    Message Length Message Length Description Through system programming, set the maximum length of a message that can be left in a user’s voice mailbox. You can set the maximum length of a message that can be left in a Subscriber Mailbox. When a caller tries to leave a message that exceeds the limit, they hear, “You have reached the recording limit.”...

  • Page 564: Message Listen Mode

    Message Listen Mode Message Listen Mode Description When a user calls their mailbox, they can dial a code to listen to all their messages, their new messages, or their saved messages. After logging onto their mailbox, the subscriber can select the category of messages to which they want to listen.

  • Page 565: Message Notification

    Message Notification Message Notification Description Dials a telephone number to let the recipient know there are new messages in their mailbox. Once activated by the Subscriber Mailbox user, Message Notification dials a telephone number to let the user know when there are new messages in their mailbox. When Message Notification is on, a subscriber who is out of the office does not have keep calling their mailbox remotely to find out if they have new mes- sages.
  • Page 566 Message Notification - If the pager service doesn’t answer, IntraMail will retry the callout number. Message Notification may eventually cancel if the callout remains unacknowledged. Conditions • None Default Setting • Disabled Programming Programming that Applies to All Types of Message Notification Assign the Line Group the system uses for Message Notification callouts.
  • Page 567 Message Notification Unique Programming for Non-pager Message Notification Set the intervals IntraMail will wait between incomplete non-pager notification callouts. In 4202-01: Wait Between Non-Pager Callout Attempts (page 873), set the minimum time ( min- utes) between non-pager Message Notification callouts. This occurs when: - The destination answers and says “Hello,”...
  • Page 568 Message Notification Unique Programming for Digital Pager Message Notification Set up the system-wide options that apply to the digital pager callback number. In 4202-08: Digital Pager Callback Number (page 877), set the Digital Pager Callback Number portion of the Message Notification callout number for a digital pager. - This is the portion of the callout number that is appended to the pager service telephone number.
  • Page 569 Message Notification Operation (Page 1 of 2) Setting Up Message Notification [Super Display Soft Key] - [Keyset Soft Key] Log onto Subscriber Mailbox. Access the Mailbox Options menu. OP (67) [Mbox Options] - [N/A] Access the Message Notification Options Menu. [Notification] - [Notif] IntraMail plays a summary of your Message Notification settings.
  • Page 570 Message Notification (Page 2 of 2) Setting Up Message Notification [Super Display Soft Key] - [Keyset Soft Key] The notification destination is a digital pager. D (3) [Pager] - [Pager] Skip this option without changing your entry. [Next] - [Next] Back up to the previous level without changing your entry.

  • Page 571: Message On Hold

    Message On Hold Message On Hold Description A prerecorded message can play to callers while they wait on Hold Message On Hold allows the System Administrator to record a message that will play to callers while they wait on Hold. For example, you can record a message summarizing available services or hours of operation. This message will play to callers as soon as you put them on Hold, and continually repeat as long as they remain on Hold.
  • Page 572 Message On Hold Operation Recording the Message On Hold [Super Display Soft Key] - [Keyset Soft Key] Log onto System Administrator’s mailbox. Access System Administrator options. (72) [System Admin] - [N/A] Select Message On Hold. [Message On Hold] - [N/A] Listen to the current Message On Hold (if any).

  • Page 573: Message Playback Direction

    Message Playback Direction Message Playback Direction Description An extension user can listen to their messages in either LIFO (last-in-first-out) or FIFO (first-in- first-out) order. When a user dials (5) after logging into their mailbox, IntraMail will play their messages in either LIFO (last-in-first-out) or FIFO (first-in-first-out) order.

  • Page 574: Message Record

    Message Record Message Record Description See Record and Send a Message (page 562) for more. 544 ◆ IntraMail Features DSX Software Manual...

  • Page 575: Message Reply

    Message Reply Message Reply Description An extension user can reply to a message in their mailbox by dialing a simple code, without knowing the caller’s extension number. A Subscriber Mailbox user can reply to a message from a co-worker by dialing , without knowing the caller’s extension or mailbox number.
  • Page 576 Message Reply Operation Message Reply [Super Display Soft Key] - [Keyset Soft Key] Log onto Subscriber Mailbox. Listen to your messages. [Listen] - [Lstn] While listening to a message. Reply to the message. (73) [Reply] - [N/A] • If the mailbox does not exist, you will be prompted to enter the mailbox number to receive the reply.

  • Page 577: Message Retention

    Message Retention Message Retention Description Automatically deletes a mailbox’s messages after a preset time. IntraMail will save a Subscriber Mailbox’s new or saved messages for the Message Retention interval and then delete them. You’ll find Message Retention to be an invaluable tool for managing IntraMail’s voice message storage space.

  • Page 578: Message Storage Limit

    Message Storage Limit Message Storage Limit Description Sets how many messages a mailbox can store. Message Storage Limit sets how many messages can be left in a Subscriber Mailbox. Message Storage Limit is another invaluable tool for managing IntraMail’s voice message storage space. To conserve storage space and make it available for new messages, decrease the Message Storage Limit.

  • Page 579: Message Waiting Lamp

    Message Waiting Lamp Message Waiting Lamp Description The Ring/Message Lamp flashes when the user has new messages waiting in their mailbox. An extension’s Ring/Message Lamp flashes on the telephone to indicate that the user has new messages waiting in their mailbox. Once IntraMail is properly installed and programmed, telephone Ring/Message Lamp operation is automatic.

  • Page 580: Multiple Company Greetings

    Multiple Company Greetings Multiple Company Greetings Description By assigning a unique Answer Table to each line, a single IntraMail system can provide individual greetings and dialing options for several companies. The Automated Attendant can answer each individual line with a unique greeting and unique set of dialing options.
  • Page 581 Multiple Company Greetings Other Related Features Features None IntraMail Features Answer Tables (page 420) Determines how the Automated Attendant answers outside calls on each line. Automated Attendant (page 433) The Automated Attendant can automatically answer the telephone system’s incoming calls, play an Instruction Menu message, and provide dialing options to callers.

  • Page 582: Next Call Routing Mailbox

    Next Call Routing Mailbox Next Call Routing Mailbox Description Provides callers with additional dialing options after they leave a message in an extension’s mailbox (depending on the setting of the Next Call Routing Mailbox Dial Mode). The Next Call Routing Mailbox provides callers with additional dialing options while listening to a Sub- scriber Mailbox recorded or default greeting.

  • Page 583: Logging Onto A Subscriber Mailbox While Listening To The Greeting

    Next Call Routing Mailbox Logging Onto a Subscriber Mailbox while Listening to the Greeting A subscriber who wishes to log onto their mailbox while listening to their greeting must have the option set in their Next Call Routing Mailbox. To allow this capability, for example: Program the Next Call Routing Mailbox # digit as LOGON to IXXX.
  • Page 584 Next Call Routing Mailbox Announcement Mailbox Options The following charts show how an Announcement Mailbox handles Automated Attendant calls. The first chart explains what happens when the outside call is directly answered by the Announcement ■ Mailbox. This happens when the Answer Table uses an Announcement Mailbox for routing instead of a Call Routing Mailbox.
  • Page 585 Next Call Routing Mailbox Routed Announcement Mailbox Routing (Page 1 of 2) (If the outside caller routes to the Announcement Mailbox from a Call Routing Mailbox) 4223-03: Next Call 4223-01: Repeat 4223-02: Hang Up Action Routing Mailbox Count After Undefined 0 (No repeats) •...
  • Page 586 Next Call Routing Mailbox (Page 2 of 2) Routed Announcement Mailbox Routing (If the outside caller routes to the Announcement Mailbox from a Call Routing Mailbox) 4223-03: Next Call 4223-01: Repeat 4223-02: Hang Up Action Routing Mailbox Count After 1-16 (valid Call x (x number of •...
  • Page 587 Next Call Routing Mailbox Programming Programming Subscriber Mailboxes Optionally assign the Next Call Routing Mailbox to a Subscriber Mailbox. In 2144-04: Next Call Routing Mailbox (page 774), specify the Routing Mailbox ( 1-16 ) that should pro- vide the caller leaving a message with additional dialing options. Optionally allow the caller to dial additional digits (not just 0) once in the Next Call Routing Mailbox.

  • Page 588: Programming Voice Mail

    Programming Voice Mail Programming Voice Mail Description Customize IntraMail using the embedded telephone programming or the separately available System Administrator PC program. You program (customize) IntraMail by using the DSX telephone programming or the Windows -based DSX System Administrator PC Program running on a PC or laptop. You can also do limited programming from the System Administrator’s mailbox.
  • Page 589 Programming Voice Mail Other Related Features Features None IntraMail Features Remote Programming (page 564) IntraMail programming is available remotely via the System Administrator PC program. System Administrator (page 576) The System Administrator can do limited IntraMail programming, such as recording Automated Attendant announcements, recording mailbox names, and deleting messages from mailboxes.

  • Page 590: Quick Message

    Quick Message Quick Message Description Automated Attendant callers can dial a digit followed by an extension number to leave a message directly in a user’s mailbox. Quick Message is a Dial Action Table action that allows Automated Attendant callers to dial a digit (normally *) followed by a mailbox number to leave a message in a Subscriber Mailbox.
  • Page 591 Quick Message Set the maximum message length for callers leaving a Quick Message in a mailbox. In 4201-02: Incoming Message Length (page 872), set the maximum length ( 1045 seconds) for Auto- mated Attendant callers leaving a Quick Message in a Subscriber Mailbox. Other Related Features Features None...

  • Page 592: Record And Send A Message

    Record and Send a Message Record and Send a Message Description A Subscriber Mailbox user can record and send a message to any other Subscriber Mailbox. A Subscriber Mailbox user can record and send a message to any other Subscriber Mailbox. Record and Send a Message is the heart of IntraMail’s voice messaging system.
  • Page 593 Record and Send a Message Operation Record and Send a Message [Super Display Soft Key] - [Keyset Soft Key] Log onto Subscriber Mailbox. Record and send a message. (77) [Record] - [Rec] Enter the number of the mailbox to receive the message. Continue.

  • Page 594: Remote Programming

    Remote Programming Remote Programming Description IntraMail programming is available remotely via the System Administrator PC program. You can remotely program IntraMail by using the Windows -based DSX System Administrator PC Program running on a PC or laptop. After the initial installation, Remote Programming allows you to customize IntraMail to meet the customer’s requirements without being on-site.
  • Page 595 Remote Programming Other Related Features Features None IntraMail Features Programming Voice Mail (page 558) Customize IntraMail using the embedded telephone programming or the separately available System Administrator PC program. Operation See the DSX PC Program User Guide. IntraMail Features ◆ 565 DSX Software Manual...

  • Page 596: Routing Mailbox

    Routing Mailbox Routing Mailbox Description A category of mailboxes used to route Automated Attendant calls Routing Mailboxes are a category of mailboxes normally used to route Automated Attendant calls. A Rout- ing Mailbox can be an Announcement Mailbox, a Call Routing Mailbox, or a Directory Dialing Mailbox. See the following for more on each of Routing Mailbox types: Announcement Mailbox (page 412) ❥...

  • Page 597: Screened Transfer

    Screened Transfer Screened Transfer Description Similar to telephone system screened transfers in which the transferring party controls the transfer. Screened Transfer is an Automated Attendant option that allows callers to directly dial system extensions. Screened Transfer (and its related feature Unscreened Transfer) allows the IntraMail Automated Attendant to transfer outside calls to system extensions without the need for a live receptionist or operator.
  • Page 598 Screened Transfer Screened Transfer (STRF) Operation • Call = Call answered by the Automated Attendant. • Extension = Extension dialed by Automated Attendant caller. If Auto Attendant Do Not Disturb is off (see page 427 for more on this feature): Extension Idle Extension Busy Extension in DND...
  • Page 599 Screened Transfer Programming Assign the STRF action to a key on the active Dial Action Table. In 4231-Digit Assignment (page 901), enter to assign an available key for Screened Transfer (STRF). Normally, the corresponding Routing option should be XXX. Note that the key you choose for this action is the first digit of the called extension number.

  • Page 600: Security Code

    Security Code Security Code Description A mailbox can have a security code to guard against unauthorized access. A mailbox can have a security code to protect it from unauthorized access. A Security Code must be 4 digits long, using 0-9. If a subscriber wants to keep their mailbox private, they can enter a Security Code. No one else can use the subscriber’s mailbox unless they know the code.
  • Page 601 Security Code Deleting a Security Code (From your System Administrator’s Mailbox) [Super Display Soft Key] - [Keyset Soft Key] Log onto System Administrator’s mailbox. Access System Administrator options. (72) [System Admin] - [N/A] Select Subscriber Mailbox Maintenance options. [Subscriber] - [Subs] Enter the number of the Subscriber Mailbox you want to maintain.

  • Page 602: Single Digit Dialing

    Single Digit Dialing Single Digit Dialing Description Allows an Automated Attendant caller to press a single key for an extension, another destination, or use an IntraMail feature. An Automated Attendant caller can press a single key to route to an extension, route to another destination, or use an IntraMail feature.
  • Page 603 Single Digit Dialing Programming Refer to the Dial Action Table Key Action Summary (page 466) for more. Other Related Features Features None IntraMail Features Instruction Menu (page 507) The active Instruction Menu should describe the Single Digit Dialing options. Also refer to the Dial Action Table Key Action Summary (page 466). Operation Refer to the Dial Action Table Key Action Summary (page 466) for more.

  • Page 604: Subscriber Mailbox

    Subscriber Mailbox Subscriber Mailbox Description The mailbox type normally used for telephone system extensions. A Subscriber Mailbox is the type of mailbox assigned to a telephone system extension. The telephone assigned to the Subscriber Mailbox is called the subscriber’s extension. When an extension user accesses their voice mail, they are using their Subscriber Mailbox.
  • Page 605 Subscriber Mailbox Conversation Record (page 462) Enable or disable the Conversation Record beep for the Subscriber Mailbox. Greeting (page 493) A Subscriber Mailbox user can record a personalized greeting for their mailbox. Callers to the user’s mailbox hear the prerecorded personalized greeting. Listening to Messages (page 512) Review this feature to learn which features are available to a subscriber while listening to messages.

  • Page 606: System Administrator

    System Administrator System Administrator Description The extension user that has IntraMail system administration capabilities. The System Administrator is a Subscriber Mailbox that has unique system administration features such as recording Instruction Menus and deleting messages in a co-worker’s mailbox. The System Administrator features are an essential part of IntraMail setup since they allow the recording of the system-wide messages and provide Subscriber Mailbox maintenance.
  • Page 607 System Administrator Programming Designate a Subscriber Mailbox as a System Administrator. In 2142-03: System Administrator (page 767), enter Other Related Features Features None IntraMail Features Subscriber Mailbox (page 574) Only a Subscriber Mailbox can be a System Administrator. Operation Refer to the individual features referenced in the System Administrator Options (page 576). Accessing the System Administrator Options [Super Display Soft Key] - [Keyset Soft Key] Log onto System Administrator’s Mailbox.

  • Page 608: System Administrator Mailbox

    System Administrator Mailbox System Administrator Mailbox Description A Subscriber Mailbox option that enables the system administration capabilities. A System Administrator Mailbox is a Subscriber Mailbox in which you have enabled the System Administra- tor option. This provides the subscriber with system administration capabilities. IntraMail can have multiple System Administrator Mailboxes.

  • Page 609: System Reinitialization

    System Reinitialization System Reinitialization Description Reinitializing IntraMail returns all programmed options to their default values. Initializing the telephone system automatically initializes all IntraMail programming. You may want to do this if the site requirements significantly change and it is easier to start over from default than remove all your custom programming.

  • Page 610: Time And Date With Voice Mail

    Time and Date with Voice Mail Time and Date with Voice Mail Description Set the system time and date. Since IntraMail is completely integrated with the telephone system software, the IntraMail time and date is the same as the phone system time and date. Since time and date is used on telephone displays and with the Auto Time Stamp and Time and Date Stamp features, be sure to set it accurately.

  • Page 611: Time And Date Stamp

    Time and Date Stamp Time and Date Stamp Description A mailbox user can listen to a message and dial a code to hear the time the message was sent, as well as the caller’s number. While listening to a message, a Subscriber Mailbox user can dial to hear the Time and Date the message was left.
  • Page 612 Time and Date Stamp Operation Hearing the Time and Date a Message was Left [Super Display Soft Key] - [Keyset Soft Key] Log onto Subscriber Mailbox. Access the Message Listen mode. [Listen] - [Lstn] Hear the time and date the message was sent. (84) •...

  • Page 613: Transfer To A Mailbox

    Transfer to a Mailbox Transfer to a Mailbox Description An extension user can transfer their active call to a co-worker’s mailbox. An extension user can transfer their active call to a co-worker’s mailbox. This lets the caller leave a personal message for the co-worker.
  • Page 614 Transfer to a Mailbox Operation In these instructions: Transferring Calls to a Mailbox [Super Display Soft Key] [Keyset Soft Key] To Transfer your active call to a mailbox: Method A (Ring first, then Transfer) Press TRANSFER . Dial the number of the mailbox to receive the Transfer. •...

  • Page 615: Transfer To A Ucd Group

    Transfer to a UCD Group Transfer to a UCD Group Description The Automated Attendant can transfer outside callers to UCD Group master numbers. The Automated Attendant can transfer outside callers to a UCD Group master number. If a customer has a UCD Group set up for a department (such as Sales or Tech Service), the Automated Attendant can send calls directly to that department without any operator intervention.

  • Page 616: Undefined Routing

    Undefined Routing Undefined Routing Description A key pad digit for which the Automated Attendant has no routing defined. An Automated Attendant Undefined Routing is a Dial Action Table key assignment for which there is no routing defined. When an Automated Attendant caller dials a digit and there is no routing assigned, IntraMail plays, “That is an invalid entry.”...

  • Page 617: Unscreened Transfer

    Unscreened Transfer Unscreened Transfer Description Similar to telephone system unscreened transfers in which the transferring party immediately extends the call. Unscreened Transfer is an Automated Attendant option that allows callers to directly dial system exten- sions. Unscreened Transfer (and its related feature Screened Transfer) allows the IntraMail Automated Attendant to transfer outside calls to system extensions without the need for a live receptionist or operator.
  • Page 618 Unscreened Transfer If Auto Attendant Do Not Disturb is on (see page 427 for more on this feature): Extension Idle Extension Busy Extension in DND With Active Greeting 1. Sends call immediately to mailbox: Recorded or Not -Plays greeting (if recorded), or Recorded -Prompts caller to start recording.
  • Page 619 Unscreened Transfer Other Related Features Features None IntraMail Features Answer Tables (page 420) Determines how the Automated Attendant answers outside calls on each line. Automated Attendant (page 433) The Answer Table determines how the Automated Attendant answers calls. Call Routing Mailbox (page 450) The mailbox associated with an Answer Table that specifies which dialing options (Dial Action Table) and announcements are available to Automated Attendant callers.

  • Page 620: Voice Mail Overflow

    Voice Mail Overflow Voice Mail Overflow Description Insures that IntraMail will pick up calls that don’t go through. The telephone system can automatically reroute unanswered outside calls to the IntraMail Automated Atten- dant. Voice Mail Overflow ensures that IntraMail will pick up calls that don’t go through. This allows callers to leave a message rather than having to call back later.
  • Page 621 Voice Mail Overflow Setting Up UCD Group Overflow To set up UCD Group overflow: See Group Mailbox (page 497). Setting Up Ring Group Overflow To set up UCD Group overflow: See Group Mailbox (page 497). Setting Up DIL Overflow To set up DIL overflow during the day: In 3112-02: Enable Day Overflow (page 819), enter to activate overflow during the day.
  • Page 622 Voice Mail Overflow Other Related Features Features None IntraMail Features Answer Tables (page 420) Determines how the Automated Attendant answers outside calls on each line. Automated Attendant (page 433) The Answer Table determines how the Automated Attendant answers calls. Call Routing Mailbox (page 450) The mailbox associated with an Answer Table that specifies which dialing options (Dial Action Table) and announcements are available to Automated Attendant callers.

  • Page 623: Voice Prompting Messages

    Voice Prompting Messages Voice Prompting Messages Description IntraMail provides Voice Prompts that tell the extension user the status or progress of their call. IntraMail provides the telephone system with Voice Prompting Messages which tell the extension user the status or progress of their call. For example, if an extension user calls a co-worker while their extension is in DND, they hear, “Please do not disturb.”...

  • Page 624: Volume Control With Voice Mail

    Volume Control with Voice Mail Volume Control with Voice Mail Description A mailbox user can turn the volume up or down while listening to their messages. Since IntraMail is completely integrated with the telephone system software, Volume Control is available at a subscriber’s keyset any time while listening to a message, greeting, or prerecorded voice prompt.

  • Page 625: System Options: 1001-1702 ◆ 595

    10xx-Configuration 100x-System 1001-Version System Options: 1001-1702 10xx-Configuration 100x-System 1001-Version Description Use this program to check the system type, the system’s software version number, and version number of the embedded DSP. Options 1001-01: System Type (System Type) Use this option to display the system name. This is a fixed option which you cannot modify. Features •...

  • Page 626: 1001-03: Dsp Version

    10xx-Configuration 100x-System 1001-Version 1001-03: DSP Version (DSP Version) Use this option to display the version of the embedded DSP software. This is a fixed option which you can- not modify. Features • None IntraMail Features • None Options • N/A Default •...

  • Page 627: 101X-Id

    10xx-Configuration 101x-ID 1011-Name 101x-ID 1011-Name Description Use this program to enter the system name and telephone number. Options 1011-01: System Name (System Name) Use this option to enter the site name (up to 18 characters). Use the Name Programming Chart (page 598) when entering names.

  • Page 628: Name Programming Chart

    10xx-Configuration 101x-ID 1011-Name Name Programming Chart Name Programming Chart Press a key the indicated number of times for desired character 1 Time 2 Times 3 Times 4 Times 5 Times 6 Times 7 Times 8 Times 9 Times & ‘ space Not used Not used...

  • Page 629: 102X-Time

    10xx-Configuration 102x-Time 1021-Set Time and Date 102x-Time 1021-Set Time and Date Description Use this program to set the system time and date. Options 1021-01: System Time (Time) Use this option to set the system time. Enter data using the 24-hour format HH:MM:SS. For example, 13:00:00 = 1:00 PM.

  • Page 630: 1022-Daylight Savings Time

    10xx-Configuration 102x-Time 1022-Daylight Savings Time 1022-Daylight Savings Time Description Use this program to set the Automatic Daylight Savings Time option. Options 1022-01: Automatic Daylight Savings Time Setting (Auto D.S.T.) Use this option to enable or disable automatic Daylight Savings Time adjustment. If enabled, the system will automatically set the time back 1 hour at 2:00 AM on the last Sunday in October and set the time forward 1 hour at 2:00 AM on the first Sunday in April.

  • Page 631: 1023-Internet (Network Time Server [Nts])

    10xx-Configuration 102x-Time 1023-Internet (Network Time Server [NTS]) 1023-Internet (Network Time Server [NTS]) Description Use this program to specify the Network Time Server (NTS). Options 1023-01: Network Time Server Name (Server Name) Use this option to enter the IP address of the Network Time Server (NTS), if any. The system will synchro- nize it’s date and time with this source.

  • Page 632: 103X-Programming

    10xx-Configuration 103x-Programming 1031-Password Entry 103x-Programming 1031-Password Entry Description Use the program to customize the system passwords. Options 1031-01: New Password (New Password) Use this option to change the system passwords. The table below shows the default system passwords. To avoid having to reinitialize your system, always keep a careful record of your passwords. Logging On with this Gives you access to these programs: Password:...

  • Page 633: 11Xx-Cpu

    11xx-CPU 110x-I/O 1101-RS232 Settings 11xx-CPU 110x-I/O 1101-RS232 Settings Description Use this program to specify the baud rate of the system’s serial port, as well as indicate when an external modem is connected to the system. Options 1101-01: Baud Rate (Baud Rate) Use this option to set the baud rate of the system’s RS232 port.

  • Page 634: 1102-Modem Settings

    11xx-CPU 110x-I/O 1102-Modem Settings 1102-Modem Settings Description Options 604 ◆ System Options: 1001-1702 DSX Software Manual...

  • Page 635: 1103-Usb Settings

    11xx-CPU 110x-I/O 1103-USB Settings 1103-USB Settings Description Options System Options: 1001-1702 ◆ 605 DSX Software Manual...

  • Page 636: 1104-Ethernet Setup

    11xx-CPU 110x-I/O 1104-Ethernet Setup 1104-Ethernet Setup Description Use this program to set the DSX system’s IP address, subnet mask, and default gateway. Options 1104-01: System IP Address (IP Addr) Use this option to set the DSX system’s IP address. You must set the IP address if you intend to connect to the system’s ethernet port.

  • Page 637: 1104-03: Default Gateway

    11xx-CPU 110x-I/O 1104-Ethernet Setup IntraMail Features • None Options • Digits using 0-9, 12 max. in the format xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx Default • 255.255.255.0 1104-03: Default Gateway (Default Gateway) The gateway address is the address in the site router to which all outbound traffic is routed. The gateway address is required in order for DSX to communicate with computers not on your LAN (i.e., over the internet or a private WAN).

  • Page 638: 111X-Tones

    11xx-CPU 111x-Tones 1111-DTMF Setup 111x-Tones 1111-DTMF Setup Description Use this program to set the DTMF durations for manual and Speed Dial calls. Options 1111-01: Manual DTMF Tone On (Man DTMF On) Use this option to set the duration of DTMF digits for outside calls manually dialed by an extension user. This is required because the system buffers the digits the user dials.
  • Page 639 11xx-CPU 111x-Tones 1111-DTMF Setup Default • System Options: 1001-1702 ◆ 609 DSX Software Manual...

  • Page 640: 1111-04: Speed Dial Dtmf Tone Off

    11xx-CPU 111x-Tones 1111-DTMF Setup 1111-04: Speed Dial DTMF Tone Off (SPD DTMF Off) Use this option to set the duration the quiet time between DTMF digits for Speed Dial outside calls automat- ically dialed by the system. Set this timer for compatibility with the connected telco or PBX/Centrex. If you set this interval too short, the telco or PBX/Centrex may not be able to set up to receive the next DTMF digit.

  • Page 641: 12Xx-Slots

    12xx-Slots 120x-Stations 1201-Type (Station Card Type) 12xx-Slots 120x-Stations 1201-Type (Station Card Type) Description This program allows you to set the type for each station PCB plugged into your system. Options 1201-01: Card Type (Card Type) Use this option to define the type of station PCB plugged into each equipment cabinet PCB slot. Although PCBs auto-ID as you insert them, this option allows you to preconfigure a system prior to installation.

  • Page 642: 1202-Ports (Primary Station Ports)

    12xx-Slots 120x-Stations 1202-Ports (Primary Station Ports) 1202-Ports (Primary Station Ports) Description Use this program to customize the system’s primary station port assignments. Options 1202-01: Primary Station Port Assignment (xx Port xx Station) Use this option to associate physical (hardware) station ports with software station ports. If you installed your PCBs in order from left to right, and let Automatic Slot Configuration set up your system, your hard- ware and software ports should match.

  • Page 643: 1203-Secondary Station Ports

    12xx-Slots 120x-Stations 1203-Secondary Station Ports 1203-Secondary Station Ports Description Use this program to customize the system’s secondary station port assignments. This is only required when installing a Digital VANGARD voice mail. Options 1203-01: Secondary Station Port Assignment (xx Port xx Station) Use this option to select a station port’s select port assignment.

  • Page 644: 121X-Lines

    12xx-Slots 121x-Lines 1211-Lines (Line Card Type) 121x-Lines 1211-Lines (Line Card Type) Description This program allows you to set the type for each line PCB plugged into your system. Options 1211-01: Card Type (Card Type) Use this option to define the type of line PCB plugged into each equipment cabinet PCB slot. Although PCBs auto-ID as you insert them, this option allows you to preconfigure a system prior to installation.

  • Page 645: 1212-Ports

    12xx-Slots 121x-Lines 1212-Ports 1212-Ports Description Use this program to customize the system’s line port assignments. Options 1212-01: Line Port Assignment (xx Port xx Station) Use this option to associate physical (hardware) line ports with software line ports. If you installed your PCBs in order from left to right, and let Automatic Slot Configuration set up your system, your hardware and software ports should match.

  • Page 646: 1213-T1/E1 Card Setup

    12xx-Slots 121x-Lines 1213-T1/E1 Card Setup 1213-T1/E1 Card Setup Description Use this program to set up the parameters of the T1/E1 PCBs. Options 1213-01: Number of PCM Channels (# PCM Channels) Use this option to determine the number of active channels on the PCB. PCBs configured for T1 have 24 avail- able channels, while E1 has 30.

  • Page 647: 1213-03: Transmit Pulse Amplitude

    12xx-Slots 121x-Lines 1213-T1/E1 Card Setup 1213-03: Transmit Pulse Amplitude (Tx Pulse Ampl.) This option controls the amplitude (strength) of the T1 signals transmitted by the PCB to the telco smart jack or your CSU (if used). Entries 0-4 correspond to the distance from the T1 PCB to either the telco’s smart jack or your CSU (depend- ing on your installation).

  • Page 648: 1213-05: Zero Suppression

    12xx-Slots 121x-Lines 1213-T1/E1 Card Setup Default • Yes (1) - Enabled 1213-05: Zero Suppression (B8ZS/HDB3) Use this option to enable or disable zero suppression for the PCB transmit path. If enabled, T1 PCBs use B8ZS zero suppression, while E1 PCBs use HDB3 zero suppression. If disabled, the PCB has no transmit zero suppression.
  • Page 649 12xx-Slots 121x-Lines 1213-T1/E1 Card Setup Options • 0 for none • 1 for metallic • 2 digital • 3 for remote for ST-Bus • 4 for payload • 5 Default • System Options: 1001-1702 ◆ 619 DSX Software Manual...

  • Page 650: 13Xx-Numbering

    13xx-Numbering 130x-Dial Plan 1301-Digits 13xx-Numbering 130x-Dial Plan 1301-Digits Description Use this option to customize the system’s number plan. For each dialed digit (0-9, excluding # and *), assign a Function Type and an Expected Digits entry. Function Type defines the digit’s function in the system (see the table below).
  • Page 651 13xx-Numbering 130x-Dial Plan 1301-Digits IntraMail Features • Flexible Mailbox Numbering Plan (page 488) Options • Default • See Default Dialing Plan (page 621). Default Dialing Plan Digit Description Function Type Expected Digits Use this option to define the Function Type and (Operator Expected Digits for dial strings beginning with 0.
  • Page 652 13xx-Numbering 130x-Dial Plan 1301-Digits Default Dialing Plan Digit Description Function Type Expected Digits Use this option to define the Function Type and (Extension Expected Digits for dial strings beginning with 8. Access) These strings are normally reserved for Intercom access (2). Use this option to define the total length of dial (Line Group strings beginning with 9.

  • Page 653: 131X-Extensions

    13xx-Numbering 131x-Extensions 1311-Stations 131x-Extensions 1311-Stations Description Use this program to customize extension numbering. Options 1311-01: Station Extension Number (Extension #) Use this option to assign an extension number to each station. Features • Flexible Numbering Plan (page 179) IntraMail Features •...

  • Page 654: 1312-Voice Mail Ports

    13xx-Numbering 131x-Extensions 1312-Voice Mail Ports 1312-Voice Mail Ports Description Use this program to customize voice mail extension numbering. Options 1312-01: Voice Mail Extension Number (Extension #) Use this option to assign an extension number to each voice mail station. Features •...

  • Page 655: 1313-Lines

    13xx-Numbering 131x-Extensions 1313-Lines 1313-Lines Description Use this program to customize line extension numbers. Options 1313-01: Line Extension Number (Extension #) Use this option to assign an extension number to each line. Features • Central Office Calls, Placing (page 78) • Flexible Numbering Plan (page 179) IntraMail Features •...

  • Page 656: 1314-Ring Groups

    13xx-Numbering 131x-Extensions 1314-Ring Groups 1314-Ring Groups Description Use this program to customize Ring Group master extension numbers. Options 1314-01: Ring Group Master Extension Number (Extension #) Use this option to assign a master extension number to each Ring Group. Although the master numbers are preassigned by default, you can customize them to meet the site requirements.

  • Page 657: 1315-Ucd Groups

    13xx-Numbering 131x-Extensions 1315-UCD Groups 1315-UCD Groups Description Use this program to customize UCD Group master extension numbers. Options 1315-01: UCD Group Master Extension Number (Extension #) Use this option to assign a master extension number to each UCD Group. Although the master numbers are preassigned by default, you can customize them to meet the site requirements.

  • Page 658: 14Xx-Cos (Class Of Service)

    14xx-COS (Class of Service) 140x-Station 1401-Features 14xx-COS (Class of Service) 140x-Station 1401-Features Description Use this program to customize station (extension) Class of Service options. Options 1401-01: System Speed Dial Access (System SPD) Use this option to enable or disable an extension’s ability to access System Speed Dial. Features •...

  • Page 659: 1401-04: Acd Supervisor

    14xx-COS (Class of Service) 140x-Station 1401-Features Default • (0) - Disabled 1401-04: ACD Supervisor (ACD Sprvsr) This option is not used. 1401-05: Soft Keys (Soft Keys) Use this option to enable or disable a keyset’s Interactive Soft Keys. Features • Interactive Soft Keys (page 210) IntraMail Features •...

  • Page 660: 1401-08: Receive Did Calls

    14xx-COS (Class of Service) 140x-Station 1401-Features Default • No (0) - Disabled 1401-08: Receive DID Calls (Allow DID Calls) Use this option to enable or disable the extension’s ability to receive DID calls. If enabled, the extension will receive DID calls routed to it by the system. If disabled, the extension will not receive DID calls. If a DID call attempts to route to an extension with this option disabled, the call follows Line Overflow.

  • Page 661: 1401-09: Receive Did Camp-On

    14xx-COS (Class of Service) 140x-Station 1401-Features 1401-09: Receive DID Camp-On (DID Camp-On) Use this option to enable or disable the ability of a DID call to Camp-On to the extension when it is busy. If enabled, a DID call to the extension will Camp-On for the 1601-02: DIL No Answer Timer. If still unan- swered, the call will divert to Key Ring.

  • Page 662: 1401-12: Call Screening

    14xx-COS (Class of Service) 140x-Station 1401-Features 1401-12: Call Screening (Call Screening) Use this option to enable or disable Call Screening. If enabled, a display keyset use can listen to (screen) a voice mail message as it is being left in their mailbox. If disabled, voice mail messages go to the mailbox normally. Features •...

  • Page 663: 1402-Access

    14xx-COS (Class of Service) 140x-Station 1402-Access 1402-Access Description Use this program to customize station access Class of Service options. Options 1402-01: Forced Line Disconnect (Forced Disconnect) Use this option to enable or disable an extension’s ability to use Forced Line Disconnect. Features •...

  • Page 664: 1402-04: Silent Monitor

    14xx-COS (Class of Service) 140x-Station 1402-Access Default • Yes 1402-04: Silent Monitor (Silent Monitor) Use this option to enable or disable an extension’s ability to use Silent Monitor. Features • Monitor / Silent Monitor (page 243) IntraMail Features • None Options •...

  • Page 665: 1403-Slt's (Single Line Telephone Options)

    14xx-COS (Class of Service) 140x-Station 1403-SLT’s (Single Line Telephone Options) 1403-SLT’s (Single Line Telephone Options) Description Use this program to customize single line telephone Class of Service options. Options 1403-01: Flash for Single Line Set (Flash for SLT) Use this option to enable or disable hookflash for analog single line extensions. Features •...

  • Page 666: 1403-04: High Voltage Message Waiting Lamp For Single Line Set

    14xx-COS (Class of Service) 140x-Station 1403-SLT’s (Single Line Telephone Options) Options • No (0) - Disabled • Yes (1) - Enabled Default • No (0) - Disabled 1403-04: High Voltage Message Waiting Lamp for Single Line Set (HV MW Lamp) Use this option to enable or disable High Voltage Message Waiting for single line ports.
  • Page 667 14xx-COS (Class of Service) 140x-Station 1403-SLT’s (Single Line Telephone Options) System Options: 1001-1702 ◆ 637 DSX Software Manual...

  • Page 668: 1404-Caller Id

    14xx-COS (Class of Service) 140x-Station 1404-Caller ID 1404-Caller ID Description Use this program to customize Caller ID Class of Service options. Options 1404-01: Caller ID Display (CID Display) Use this option to enable or disable the ability of an extension to display Caller ID. If enabled, Caller ID will occur for all extensions with this Class of Service provided Caller ID is enabled in other system program- ming.

  • Page 669: 1404-04: Caller Id Display Separator

    14xx-COS (Class of Service) 140x-Station 1404-Caller ID Options • (0) - Disabled • (1) - Enabled Default • (0) - Disabled 1404-04: Caller ID Display Separator (CID Display “-”) Use this option to enable or disable the Caller ID display separator. If enabled, the telephone displays a dash separator after the area code and after the local exchange on a 7 or 10 digit number.
  • Page 670 14xx-COS (Class of Service) 140x-Station 1404-Caller ID Default • Yes (1) - Enabled 640 ◆ System Options: 1001-1702 DSX Software Manual...

  • Page 671: 1405-Distinctive Ringing

    14xx-COS (Class of Service) 140x-Station 1405-Distinctive Ringing 1405-Distinctive Ringing Description Use this program to customize Distinctive Ringing Class of Service options. Options 1405-01: Ring Type Configuration (Ring Config) If enabled, this option allows an extension to customize the sound of their Ring Types by pressing the CON- (CNFG) soft key.
  • Page 672 14xx-COS (Class of Service) 140x-Station 1405-Distinctive Ringing IntraMail Features • None Options • No (0) - Disabled • Yes (1) - Enabled Default • No (0) - Disabled 642 ◆ System Options: 1001-1702 DSX Software Manual...

  • Page 673: 1406-Call Forwarding Options

    14xx-COS (Class of Service) 140x-Station 1406-Call Forwarding Options 1406-Call Forwarding Options Description Use this program to customize Call Forwarding Class of Service options. Options 1406-01: Call Forwarding Off-Premises (Off-Premise) Use this option to enable or disable an extension’s ability to use Off Premise Call Forwarding. When dis- abled, the Off Premise Call Forwarding option is hidden on the telephone display.

  • Page 674: 1407-Paging

    14xx-COS (Class of Service) 140x-Station 1407-Paging 1407-Paging Description Use this program to customize paging Class of Service options. Options 1407-01: Make All Call Page (All Call Page) Use this option to enable or disable an extension’s ability to make an All Call Paging announcement. Features •...

  • Page 675: 1407-04: Make Page Into Zone 3

    14xx-COS (Class of Service) 140x-Station 1407-Paging 1407-04: Make Page Into Zone 3 (Page Zone 3) Use this option to enable or disable an extension’s ability to make a Paging announcement into zone 3. Features • Paging (page 259) IntraMail Features •...

  • Page 676: 1407-08: Make Page Into Zone 7

    14xx-COS (Class of Service) 140x-Station 1407-Paging Options • No (0) - Disabled • Yes (1) - Enabled Default • Yes (1) - Enabled 1407-08: Make Page Into Zone 7 (Page Zone 7) Use this option to enable or disable an extension’s ability to make a Paging announcement into zone 7. Features •...

  • Page 677: 141X-Line

    14xx-COS (Class of Service) 141x-Line 1411-Access 141x-Line 1411-Access Description Use this program to customize line access Class of Service options. Options 1411-01: Camp-On to Busy Lines (Camp-On Busy Lines) Use this option to enable or disable an extension’s ability to Camp-On to a busy line. This option does not restrict Callback.

  • Page 678: 1411-04: Enhanced Last Number Redial

    14xx-COS (Class of Service) 141x-Line 1411-Access Default • No (0) - Disabled 1411-04: Enhanced Last Number Redial (Enhanced LND) Use this option to enable or disable Enhanced Last Number Redial for the extension. If enabled, the extension has Enhanced Last Number Redial with the 5 number redial buffer and the enhanced operation. If disabled, the extension has traditional Last Number Redial with a single number redial buffer and the standard operation.

  • Page 679: 1412-Toll Restriction

    14xx-COS (Class of Service) 141x-Line 1412-Toll Restriction 1412-Toll Restriction Description Use this program to customize Class of Service options that affect call restriction. Options 1412-01: Walking Class of Service (Day) (Walking COS Day) Use this option to enable or disable Walking Class of Service for the extension while the system is in the day mode.
  • Page 680 14xx-COS (Class of Service) 141x-Line 1412-Toll Restriction Options • No (0) - Disabled • Yes (1) - Enabled Default • No (0) - Disabled 650 ◆ System Options: 1001-1702 DSX Software Manual...

  • Page 681: 1412-04: Forced Account Codes

    14xx-COS (Class of Service) 141x-Line 1412-Toll Restriction 1412-04: Forced Account Codes (Forced A/C) Use this option to enable or disable Forced Account Codes. If disabled, Optional Account Codes are still available. Features • Account Codes (page 14) IntraMail Features • None Options •...

  • Page 682: 15Xx-Options

    15xx-Options 150x-Operators 1501-Setup 15xx-Options 150x-Operators 1501-Setup Description Use this program to specify the number of system operators. Options 1501-01: Number of Operators (# of Operators) Use this option to specify the number of operators in the system (1-4). Features • Attendant Position (page 24) IntraMail Features •...

  • Page 683: 1502-Assignments

    15xx-Options 150x-Operators 1502-Assignments 1502-Assignments Description Use this program to assign the system’s operator extensions. If you enabled more than one operator in 1501- 01: Number of Operators (page 652), all four of the following options are available. However, only the num- ber you specified in 1501-01: Number of Operators will function.

  • Page 684: 1502-04: Operator Number 4

    15xx-Options 150x-Operators 1502-Assignments Default • None 1502-04: Operator Number 4 (Operator 4) Assign the fourth operator’s extension number. Be sure you have entered the correct number of operators in 1501-01: Number of Operators (page 652). Features • Attendant Position (page 24) IntraMail Features •...

  • Page 685: 151X-Stations

    15xx-Options 151x-Stations 1511-Display 151x-Stations 1511-Display Description Use this program to select the extension name entry format and clock display. Options 1511-01: Name Format (Name Format) Use this option to determine how extension names should be entered in 2101-02: Station Name (page 720) or via the telephone.

  • Page 686: 1511-02: Clock Display Format

    15xx-Options 151x-Stations 1511-Display 1511-02: Clock Display Format (Clock Display Format) Use this option to change the format of a keyset’s Time and Date display. See the chart below for available entries. After changing the entry for this option, an extension user must either lift and replace the handset or receive an incoming call before their display will show the new format.

  • Page 687: 1512-Calls

    15xx-Options 151x-Stations 1512-Calls 1512-Calls Description Use this program to set up the call handling Auto Handsfree and Call Waiting tones options. Options 1512-01: Automatic Handsfree (Auto-Handsfree) Use this option to enable or disable Automatic Handsfree system-wide. Features • Automatic Handsfree (page 30) IntraMail Features •...

  • Page 688: 1513-Intercom

    15xx-Options 151x-Stations 1513-Intercom 1513-Intercom Description Use this program to enable or disable Intercom voice announcements and Auto Handsfree system-wide. Options 1513-01: Intercom Voice Announcements (Voice Announce) Use this option to enable or disable system-wide voice-announced Intercom calls. You must enable this option if you have 1513-02: Handsfree Reply (Handsfree Answerback) enabled below.

  • Page 689: 152X-Moh/Bgm

    15xx-Options 152x-MOH/BGM 1521-Setup 152x-MOH/BGM 1521-Setup Description Use this program to set up options for Music on Hold and Background Music. Options 1521-01: Enable Music on Hold (Enable MOH) Use this option to enable or disable Music on Hold system wide. Features •...

  • Page 690: 1521-04: Background Music Over External Page

    15xx-Options 152x-MOH/BGM 1521-Setup Default • 0 1521-04: Background Music over External Page (BGM Over Page) Enable this option to have Background Music (if installed) play over the system's External Page. Disable this option if you don't want Background Music to play over the system's External Page. Features •...

  • Page 691: 1521-05: Audio Input 1 Gain Setting

    15xx-Options 152x-MOH/BGM 1521-Setup 1521-05: Audio Input 1 Gain Setting (Audio #1 Gain) Use this option to set the gain (volume) of Audio Input 1. Features • Music on Hold (page 246) IntraMail Features • None Options • (-12 dB to +12 dB in 1 dB steps) 01-25 Default •...

  • Page 692: 153X-Paging

    15xx-Options 153x-Paging 1531-Setup 153x-Paging 1531-Setup Description Use this program to set up External Paging. Options 1531-01: External Page Ring Type (Page Ring Type) Use this option to indicate the type of ringing that will broadcast over the External Page (none, station, or line). Features •...

  • Page 693: 1531-03: External Page Ring Volume

    15xx-Options 153x-Paging 1531-Setup 1531-03: External Page Ring Volume (Page Ring Volume) Use this option to adjust the volume of ringing over the External Paging system. This option does not affect the volume of Background Music, Door Chime, or External Page voice broadcasts. You can additionally control the volume of audio broadcasting from the External Page port in 1531-05: External Page Gain.

  • Page 694: 1531-04: Door Chime Over External Page

    15xx-Options 153x-Paging 1531-Setup 1531-04: Door Chime Over External Page (Page DoorChime) Use this option to enable Door Chimes over External Page. Features • Paging (page 259) IntraMail Features • None Options • No (0) - Disabled • Yes (1) - Enabled Default •...

  • Page 695: 1532-Ring Control

    15xx-Options 153x-Paging 1532-Ring Control 1532-Ring Control Description If External Paging is set up to broadcast line ringing, use this program to specify the ringing type for each line. Options 1532-[01-64]: External Page Line Ringing (Line nn Ring) If 1531-01: External Page Ring Type is 2 (line), use this option to individually set the ringing for each line over the External Page.

  • Page 696: 154X-Smdr (Station Message Detail Recording)

    15xx-Options 154x-SMDR (Station Message Detail Recording) 1541-Setup 154x-SMDR (Station Message Detail Recording) 1541-Setup Description Use this program to set up the SMDR options. Options 1541-01: SMDR Port (SMDR Port) Use this option to specify the port the system uses for SMDR. Features •...

  • Page 697: 155X-Account Codes

    15xx-Options 155x-Account Codes 1551-Setup 155x-Account Codes 1551-Setup Description Use this program to customize system-wide Account Code options. Options 1551-01: Dial # to Enter Account Codes (# Key AC Codes) Use this option to enable an extension user to dial # to enter an Account Code while on an outside call. If dis- abled, the extension user can only enter an Account Code by pressing the Account Code soft key or a uniquely programmed Account Code Programmable Function Key.

  • Page 698: 1551-04: Account Code Toll Restriction Level

    15xx-Options 155x-Account Codes 1551-Setup Options • No (0) - Disabled • Yes (1) - Enabled Default • No (0) - Disabled 1551-04: Account Code Toll Restriction Level (AC Toll Level) If 1412-06: Account Codes for Toll Calls Only (page 651) is enabled, use this option to differentiate toll calls from local calls for Account Code purposes.

  • Page 699: 16Xx-Timers

    16xx-Timers 160x-Feature Timers 1601-Incoming Call Timers 16xx-Timers 160x-Feature Timers 1601-Incoming Call Timers Description Use this program to adjust timers that affect incoming calls. Options 1601-01: Line No Answer Timer (Ring No Answer) Use this option to set how long Hold Recall rings the extension that placed the call on hold before Key Ring occurs.

  • Page 700: 1601-03: Call Forward No Answer Timer

    16xx-Timers 160x-Feature Timers 1601-Incoming Call Timers Options • 1-9999 seconds • 0 for disabled Default • 15 seconds 1601-03: Call Forward No Answer Timer (CFWD No Answer) For Call Forwarding Ring No Answer, use this option set how long a forwarded call rings an unanswered extension before routing to the forwarding destination.

  • Page 701: 1602-Outgoing Call Timers

    16xx-Timers 160x-Feature Timers 1602-Outgoing Call Timers 1602-Outgoing Call Timers Description Use this program to adjust timers that affect outgoing calls. Options 1602-01: Interdigit Timer (Interdigit Time) Use this option to set the Intercom interdigit time. When an extension user places a call, they must dial each succeeding digit within this interval.
  • Page 702 16xx-Timers 160x-Feature Timers 1602-Outgoing Call Timers Options • 1-9999 in 100 mS increments (e.g., 10 = 1 second, 100 = 10 seconds). Default • 20 (2 seconds) 672 ◆ System Options: 1001-1702 DSX Software Manual...

  • Page 703: 1602-04: Dial Pause Timer

    16xx-Timers 160x-Feature Timers 1602-Outgoing Call Timers 1602-04: Dial Pause Timer (Interdigit Time) Use this option to set the length of a pause stored in a Speed Dial bin. Features • Speed Dial (page 315) IntraMail Features • Centrex Transfer (page 460) Options •...
  • Page 704 16xx-Timers 160x-Feature Timers 1602-Outgoing Call Timers IntraMail Features • None Options • 1-99 seconds Default • 6 674 ◆ System Options: 1001-1702 DSX Software Manual...

  • Page 705: 1603-Recall Timers

    16xx-Timers 160x-Feature Timers 1603-Recall Timers 1603-Recall Timers Description Use this program to adjust timers that affect system recalls. Options 1603-01: Transfer Recall Timer (Transfer Recall) Use this timer to set how long a transferred call rings an idle destination extension or Ring Group before recall- ing the extension from which it was initially transferred.
  • Page 706 16xx-Timers 160x-Feature Timers 1603-Recall Timers Options • 1-9999 seconds • 0 for disabled Default • 90 seconds 676 ◆ System Options: 1001-1702 DSX Software Manual...

  • Page 707: 1603-04: Park Orbit Recall Timer

    16xx-Timers 160x-Feature Timers 1603-Recall Timers 1603-04: Park Orbit Recall Timer (Orbit Recall) Use this option to set how long a call stays in System Park Orbit before it recalls the extension that parked it. This timer if for orbits 60-67 only. The recall for orbits 68 and 69 is fixed at 5 minutes. Features •...

  • Page 708: 1604-Station Timers

    16xx-Timers 160x-Feature Timers 1604-Station Timers 1604-Station Timers Description Use this program to adjust timers that affect stations. Options 1604-01: Delay Ring Timer (Delay Ring) Use this option to set how long the system waits before ringing an extension that has the Delayed Ringing option enabled.
  • Page 709 16xx-Timers 160x-Feature Timers 1604-Station Timers Features • Extended Ringing (page 153) IntraMail Features • None Options • 1-9999 seconds • for disabled Default • seconds System Options: 1001-1702 ◆ 679 DSX Software Manual...

  • Page 710: 1605-Control Timers

    16xx-Timers 160x-Feature Timers 1605-Control Timers 1605-Control Timers Description Use this program to adjust timers that affect various system features. Options 1605-01: Page Duration Timer (Page Duration) Use this option to set the maximum length of Page announcements. Features • Paging (page 259) IntraMail Features •...

  • Page 711: 1605-04: Forced Program Exit Timer

    16xx-Timers 160x-Feature Timers 1605-Control Timers 1605-04: Forced Program Exit Timer (Program Exit) Use this option to set the Forced Program Exit timer. If a telephone in the programming mode is inactive longer than this interval, the system automatically cancels the programming mode and makes the telephone idle. Features •...

  • Page 712: 161X-Coi (Analog Line) Timers

    16xx-Timers 161x-COI (Analog Line) Timers 1611-Incoming 161x-COI (Analog Line) Timers 1611-Incoming Description Use this program to adjust timers that affect incoming calls on the line (COIU) PCBs. Options 1611-01: Minimum Ring Detect Timer (Ring Detect) Use this option to set the threshold for ring detection. If the ring signal is longer than this interval, the system interprets the signal as valid ringing.

  • Page 713: 1611-03: Minimum Double Ring Detection Off Timer

    16xx-Timers 161x-COI (Analog Line) Timers 1611-Incoming 1611-03: Minimum Double Ring Detection Off Timer (Double Ring Min) The system uses this option to detect valid double ring from the connected PBX. Valid double ring must be longer than this interval. Features •...

  • Page 714: 1611-04: Maximum Double Ring Detection Off Timer

    16xx-Timers 161x-COI (Analog Line) Timers 1611-Incoming 1611-04: Maximum Double Ring Detection Off Timer (Double Ring Max) The system uses this option to detect valid double ring from the connected PBX. Valid double ring must be less than this interval. Features •...

  • Page 715: 1612-Outgoing

    16xx-Timers 161x-COI (Analog Line) Timers 1612-Outgoing 1612-Outgoing Description Use this program to adjust timers that affect outgoing calls on the line (COIU) PCBs. Options 1612-01: DP Break Timer (Break Time) Use this timer to set the duration of the Dial Pulse Break signal (i.e., relay open). This is the “off” time in a Dial Pulse digit.

  • Page 716: 1612-04: Pbx/Centrex Flash Timer

    16xx-Timers 161x-COI (Analog Line) Timers 1612-Outgoing Options • 100-9999 mS Default • 800 mS 1612-04: PBX/Centrex Flash Timer (Flash 1 Time) Use this timer to set the Flash interval. When a user flashes a line (manually or in a Speed Dial number), the system opens the line circuit for this interval.

  • Page 717: 1612-07: Shunt Pause Timer

    16xx-Timers 161x-COI (Analog Line) Timers 1612-Outgoing 1612-07: Shunt Pause Timer (Shunt Pause) Use this option to set the Shunt Pause Timer (Dial Pulse Mute Timer) for the ATRU PCB. While dial pulsing or doing a Flash, the ATRU PCB switches a low resistance shunt across tip and ring to maintain the correct impedance on the line.

  • Page 718: 1613-Loop Control

    16xx-Timers 161x-COI (Analog Line) Timers 1613-Loop Control 1613-Loop Control Description Use this program to adjust timers that affect the loop on the line (COIU) PCBs. Options 1613-01: Loop Current Detection Timer (Loop Detect) For loop start lines, loop current must be present for this interval before the system seizes the line. Set this interval for compatibility with the connected telco or PBX/Centrex.

  • Page 719: 1613-03: Power Failure Recovery Detect Timer

    16xx-Timers 161x-COI (Analog Line) Timers 1613-Loop Control 1613-03: Power Failure Recovery Detect Timer (Loop Recovery) Use this option to set the Power Failure Recovery Detect time. When the ATRU or COIU PCB recovers from a power failure, it checks the power failure line for loop current for this interval. If loop current is detected, it assumes the power failure telephone is still connected and does not tear down the call.

  • Page 720: 162X-Sli (Analog Single Line) Timers

    16xx-Timers 162x-SLI (Analog Single Line) Timers 1621-Incoming 162x-SLI (Analog Single Line) Timers 1621-Incoming Description Use this program to adjust the timers that affect incoming calls to analog single line telephones. Options 1621-01: Minimum DP Break Timer (Minimum Break) Use this option to define the minimum amount of time the loop must be opened to properly decode the dial pulse digits sent from analog devices connected to single line PCBs.

  • Page 721: 1621-03: Minimum Dp Make Timer

    16xx-Timers 162x-SLI (Analog Single Line) Timers 1621-Incoming 1621-03: Minimum DP Make Timer (Minimum Make) Use this option to define the minimum amount of time the loop must be closed to properly decode the dial pulse digits sent from analog devices connected to single line PCBs. Change this value only if the con- nected analog devices are set to dial at a rate other than 10 PPS.

  • Page 722: 1621-04: Maximum Dp Make Timer

    16xx-Timers 162x-SLI (Analog Single Line) Timers 1621-Incoming 1621-04: Maximum DP Make Timer (Maximum Make) Use this option to define the maximum amount of time the loop must be closed to properly decode the dial pulse digits sent from analog devices connected to SLIU PCBs. Change this value only if the connected analog devices are set to dial at a rate other than 10 PPS.

  • Page 723: 1621-08: Dial Pulse Guard Timer

    16xx-Timers 162x-SLI (Analog Single Line) Timers 1621-Incoming IntraMail Features • None Options • 5-1275 Default • 1621-08: Dial Pulse Guard Timer (Dial Pulse Guard) Use this option to set the interval the single line PCB waits between dial pulse digits before attempting to detect any additional DP digits.

  • Page 724: 1622-Outgoing

    16xx-Timers 162x-SLI (Analog Single Line) Timers 1622-Outgoing 1622-Outgoing Description Use this program to adjust the timers that affect outgoing calls from analog single line telephones. Options 1622-01: Loop Disconnect Timer (Loop Disconnect) Use this option to determine how long the single line PCB opens the loop to the connected analog device after the far end disconnects.

  • Page 725: 163X-T1/E1 Timers

    16xx-Timers 163x-T1/E1 Timers 1631-Incoming 163x-T1/E1 Timers 1631-Incoming Description Use this program to adjust the timers that affect incoming T1/E1 calls. Options 1631-01: Receive Loop Detection Timer (Rx Loop Detect) For loop start T1 lines, loop current must be present for this interval before the system seizes the line. Set this interval for compatibility with the T1 service provider.

  • Page 726: 1631-04: Receive Dial Pulse Minimum Make Timer

    16xx-Timers 163x-T1/E1 Timers 1631-Incoming Options • 4-1020 mS Default • 104 mS 1631-04: Receive Dial Pulse Minimum Make Timer (Rx Min Make) Use this option to set the minimum required duration of the T1 circuit receive Dial Pulse Make signal (i.e., relay closed).

  • Page 727: 1631-07: Receive Maximum Flash Timer

    16xx-Timers 163x-T1/E1 Timers 1631-Incoming 1631-07: Receive Maximum Flash Timer (Rx Max Flash) Information to be provided. Features • T1 Lines (page 338) IntraMail Features • None Options • 16-4080 Default • 1008 1631-08: Receive Minimum Clear Signal Timer (Rx Min Clear) Information to be provided.

  • Page 728: 1632-Outgoing

    16xx-Timers 163x-T1/E1 Timers 1632-Outgoing 1632-Outgoing Description Use this program to adjust the timers that affect outgoing T1/E1 calls. Options 1632-01: Transmit Dial Pulse Break Timer (Tx Break Time) Use this option to set the duration of the T1 circuit transmit Dial Pulse Break signal (i.e., relay open). This is the “off”...

  • Page 729: 1632-04: Transmit Flash Timer

    16xx-Timers 163x-T1/E1 Timers 1632-Outgoing IntraMail Features • None Options • 16-4080 Default • 1632-04: Transmit Flash Timer (Tx Flash Time) Information to be provided. Features • T1 Lines (page 338) IntraMail Features • None Options • 16-4080 Default • 1632-05: Transmit Clear Signal Timer (Tx Clear Time) Information to be provided.

  • Page 730: 164X-T1 Specific Timers

    16xx-Timers 164x-T1 Specific Timers 1641-Ring Detect 164x-T1 Specific Timers 1641-Ring Detect Description Use this program to adjust the T1 Ring Detect timers. Options 1641-01: Minimum Ring Detect Timer (Ring Detect) Information to be provided. Features • T1 Lines (page 338) IntraMail Features •...

  • Page 731: 1641-05: Ring Stop Detection Timer

    16xx-Timers 164x-T1 Specific Timers 1641-Ring Detect Features • T1 Lines (page 338) IntraMail Features • None Options • 4-1020 Default • 1641-05: Ring Stop Detection Timer (Ring Stop) Information to be provided. Features • T1 Lines (page 338) IntraMail Features •...

  • Page 732: 1642-Call Control

    16xx-Timers 164x-T1 Specific Timers 1642-Call Control 1642-Call Control Description Use this program to adjust the T1 Call Control timers. Options 1642-01: Transmit Wink Timer (TX Wink Time) Information to be provided. Features • T1 Lines (page 338) IntraMail Features • None Options •...
  • Page 733 16xx-Timers 164x-T1 Specific Timers 1642-Call Control Features • T1 Lines (page 338) IntraMail Features • None Options • 4-1020 • for undefined (disabled) Default • Undefined (disabled) System Options: 1001-1702 ◆ 703 DSX Software Manual...

  • Page 734: 165X-E1 Specific Timers

    16xx-Timers 165x-E1 Specific Timers 1651-TX (Transmit Timers) 165x-E1 Specific Timers 1651-TX (Transmit Timers) Description Use this program to adjust the E1 transmit timers. Options 1651-01: Transmit Seize Acknowledge Timer (Tx Seize Ack) Information to be provided. Features • T1 Lines (page 338) IntraMail Features •...

  • Page 735: 1651-05: Transmit Seize Signal (Bzl) Timer

    16xx-Timers 165x-E1 Specific Timers 1651-TX (Transmit Timers) Features • T1 Lines (page 338) IntraMail Features • None Options • 16-4080 Default • 1008 1651-05: Transmit Seize Signal (BZL) Timer (Tx Seize Signal (BZL)) Information to be provided. Features • T1 Lines (page 338) IntraMail Features •...

  • Page 736: 1652-Rx (Receive Timers)

    16xx-Timers 165x-E1 Specific Timers 1652-RX (Receive Timers) 1652-RX (Receive Timers) Description Use this program to adjust the E1 receive timers. Options 1652-01: Receive Minimum Seize Acknowledge Timer (Rx Min Seize Ack) Information to be provided. Features • T1 Lines (page 338) IntraMail Features •...

  • Page 737: 1652-05: Receive Minimum Answer Timer

    16xx-Timers 165x-E1 Specific Timers 1652-RX (Receive Timers) Features • T1 Lines (page 338) IntraMail Features • None Options • 4-1020 Default • 1652-05: Receive Minimum Answer Timer (Rx Min Answer) Information to be provided. Features • T1 Lines (page 338) IntraMail Features •...

  • Page 738: 1652-08: Receive Maximum Meter Pulse Timer

    16xx-Timers 165x-E1 Specific Timers 1652-RX (Receive Timers) 1652-08: Receive Maximum Meter Pulse Timer (Rx Max Meter Pls) Information to be provided. Features • T1 Lines (page 338) IntraMail Features • None Options • 4-1020 mS Default • 300 mS 1652-09: Receive Minimum Double Answer (BZL) Timer (Rx Min Dbl Answer [BZL]) Information to be provided.

  • Page 739: 1652-12: Receive Line Block Recover Timer

    16xx-Timers 165x-E1 Specific Timers 1652-RX (Receive Timers) Default • 2048 1652-12: Receive Line Block Recover Timer (Rx Line Block Recover) Information to be provided. Features • T1 Lines (page 338) IntraMail Features • None Options • 64-16320 Default • 2048 System Options: 1001-1702 ◆...

  • Page 740: 1653-Mfc Incoming Timers

    16xx-Timers 165x-E1 Specific Timers 1653-MFC Incoming Timers 1653-MFC Incoming Timers Description Use this program to adjust the E1 MFC incoming timers. Options 1653-01: GI Signal Timer (GI Signal) Information to be provided. Features • T1 Lines (page 338) IntraMail Features •...
  • Page 741 16xx-Timers 165x-E1 Specific Timers 1653-MFC Incoming Timers Features • T1 Lines (page 338) IntraMail Features • None Options • 50-600 Default • System Options: 1001-1702 ◆ 711 DSX Software Manual...

  • Page 742: 1654-Mfc Outgoing Timers

    16xx-Timers 165x-E1 Specific Timers 1654-MFC Outgoing Timers 1654-MFC Outgoing Timers Description Use this program to adjust the E1 MFC outgoing timers. Options 1654-01: GA Response Timer (GA Response) Information to be provided. Features • T1 Lines (page 338) IntraMail Features •...

  • Page 743: 1654-05: Gc Response Timer

    16xx-Timers 165x-E1 Specific Timers 1654-MFC Outgoing Timers Features • T1 Lines (page 338) IntraMail Features • None Options • 1-32 seconds Default • seconds 1654-05: GC Response Timer (GC Response) Information to be provided. Features • T1 Lines (page 338) IntraMail Features •...

  • Page 744: 17Xx-Speed Dial (System)

    17xx-Speed Dial (System) 170x-Setup 1701-Format 17xx-Speed Dial (System) 170x-Setup 1701-Format Description Use this program to set the maximum number of System Speed Dial bins (9, 99, or 999) that users can dial. This does not limit the number of bins you can program in 1702-Assignment (System Speed Dial Assign- ment) (page 715) and set up under System Speed Dial keys.

  • Page 745: 1702-Assignment (System Speed Dial Assignment)

    17xx-Speed Dial (System) 170x-Setup 1702-Assignment (System Speed Dial Assignment) 1702-Assignment (System Speed Dial Assignment) Description Use this program to enter System Speed Dial numbers in to system memory. Options 1702-[001-999]: Select System Speed Dial Bin to Program (Bin #) Use this option to select the System Speed Dial bin you want to program (normally 001-999). Features •...

  • Page 746: 1702-[001-999]: System Speed Dial Bin Group

    17xx-Speed Dial (System) 170x-Setup 1702-Assignment (System Speed Dial Assignment) • Directory Dialing (page 131) • Speed Dial (page 315) IntraMail Features • Caller ID and Voice Mail (page 456) • External Transfer (page 483) Options • 1-64 for lines 1-64 Default •...

  • Page 747: 1702-[001-999]: System Speed Dial Bin Name

    17xx-Speed Dial (System) 170x-Setup 1702-Assignment (System Speed Dial Assignment) 1702-[001-999]: System Speed Dial Bin Name (Bin Name) Use this option to enter a name (up to 16 characters) for the System Speed Dial bin. When entering names, use the following Name Programming chart. Name Programming Chart Press a key the indicated number of times for desired character 1 Time...
  • Page 748 17xx-Speed Dial (System) 170x-Setup 1702-Assignment (System Speed Dial Assignment) Features • Directory Dialing (page 131) IntraMail Features • Caller ID and Voice Mail (page 456) • External Transfer (page 483) Options • Alpha-numeric characters (16 max.). See Name Programming Chart above. Default •...

  • Page 749: Stations: 2101-2501

    21xx-Configuration 210x-Setup 2101-Type Stations: 2101-2501 21xx-Configuration 210x-Setup 2101-Type Description Use this program to set up basic station (extension) options. If programming multiple extensions, you may find 9021-Station Copy (page 921) a handy time-saving tool. Options 2101-01: Station Type (Type) Use this option to assign circuit type to station devices. All circuit types should auto-ID when the station device is plugged in.

  • Page 750: 2101-02: Station Name

    21xx-Configuration 210x-Setup 2101-Type 2101-02: Station Name (Name) Use this option to assign a name (up to 16 characters) to the extension port. Features • Directory Dialing (page 131) • Names for Extensions and Lines (page 249) IntraMail Features • Directory Dialing (page 469) Options •...
  • Page 751 21xx-Configuration 210x-Setup 2101-Type Name Programming Chart Press a key the indicated number of times for desired character 1 Time 2 Times 3 Times 4 Times 5 Times 6 Times 7 Times 8 Times 9 Times Restore the previous entry, CHECK Station Options: 2101-2501 ◆...

  • Page 752: 2101-03: Station Display Language

    21xx-Configuration 210x-Setup 2101-Type 2101-03: Station Display Language (Language) Use this option to set the language for the extension’s display (including system programming). You can also set this option from the keyset using the soft keys. Features • Language Selection (page 217) IntraMail Features •...

  • Page 753: 2101-05: Outgoing Ani Id

    21xx-Configuration 210x-Setup 2101-Type 2101-05: Outgoing ANI ID (ANI ID) For E1 lines only, use this option to specify the outgoing ANI data that identifies the extension (1-4 digits appended to the system’s telephone number). This option is only for E1 MFC dialing. It is not used in North America.

  • Page 754: 2102-Access

    21xx-Configuration 210x-Setup 2102-Access 2102-Access Description Use this program to customize station (extension) access options. If programming multiple extensions, you may find 9021-Station Copy (page 921) a handy time-saving tool. Options 2102-01: Class of Service (COS) Use this option to assign the extension’s Class of Service. Features •...

  • Page 755: 2102-04: User Programming Access Level

    21xx-Configuration 210x-Setup 2102-Access 2102-04: User Programming Access Level (Pgm Level) Use this option to set an extensions Programming Access Level. This setting determines which User Programmable Features the extension can use. Features • Call Forwarding (page 44) • Extension Locking (page 166) •...

  • Page 756: 2103-Ringing

    21xx-Configuration 210x-Setup 2103-Ringing 2103-Ringing Description Use this program to customize station (extension) Distinctive Ringing options. If programming multiple extensions, you may find 9021-Station Copy (page 921) a handy time-saving tool. Options 2103-01: Day Ring Type (Day Ring Type) Use this option to set the Extension Override Ring Type option for day ring lines ringing the extension. This is the same as following the ASSIGN (ASGN) soft key.

  • Page 757: 2103-04: Station's Intercom Ring Tone

    21xx-Configuration 210x-Setup 2103-Ringing you make in this option will take effect. If this option is 1-3, the setting you make in this option will only take effect if 1405-02: Station Ring Override (page 641) is also enabled. Features • Distinctive Ringing (page 135) IntraMail Features •...

  • Page 758: 2103-07: Station's Ring "A" Tone

    21xx-Configuration 210x-Setup 2103-Ringing Default • 3 2103-07: Station’s Ring “A” Tone (Type-A Ring Tone) For the station’s type “A” incoming ring, use this option to select the Distinctive Ringing ring tone used. Features • Distinctive Ringing (page 135) IntraMail Features •...

  • Page 759: 2104-Display

    21xx-Configuration 210x-Setup 2104-Display 2104-Display Description Use this program to adjust the station (extension) display backlight brightness settings. If programming multiple extensions, you may find 9021-Station Copy (page 921) a handy time-saving tool. Options 2104-01: Backlight Brightness While Active (Active Brightness) Use this option to set the telephone’s backlight brightness while it is active.
  • Page 760 21xx-Configuration 210x-Setup 2104-Display 730 ◆ Station Options: 2101-2501 DSX Software Manual...

  • Page 761: 211X-Options

    21xx-Configuration 211x-Options 2111-Features 211x-Options 2111-Features Description Use this program to enable or disable various station (extension) features. If programming multiple extensions, you may find 9021-Station Copy (page 921) a handy time-saving tool. Options 2111-01: Allow Do Not Disturb (Allow DND) Use this option to enable or disable Do Not Disturb at the extension.

  • Page 762: 2111-04: Ringing Line Preference

    21xx-Configuration 211x-Options 2111-Features 2111-04: Ringing Line Preference (Ringing Line Pref) Use this option to enable or disable Ringing Line Preference for the extension. Features • Ringing Line Preference (page 295) IntraMail Features • None Options • No (0) - Disabled •...

  • Page 763: 2111-08: Answering Machine

    21xx-Configuration 211x-Options 2111-Features IntraMail Features • None Options • (0) - Disabled • (1) - Enabled Default • (1) - Enabled 2111-08: Answering Machine (Answering Machine) For systems without voice mail that are using a customer-provided answering machine, use this option to designate the extension as an Answering Machine.

  • Page 764: 2111-09: Personal Speed Dial

    21xx-Configuration 211x-Options 2111-Features 2111-09: Personal Speed Dial (Personal SPD) Use this option to enable or disable Personal Speed Dial for the extension. If the extension has this option disabled, Call Forwarding Off Premises is not available. Features • Call Forwarding Off Premises (page 51) •...

  • Page 765: 2112-Speaker Control

    21xx-Configuration 211x-Options 2112-Speaker Control 2112-Speaker Control Description Use this program to customize features of the station (extension) speaker. If programming multiple extensions, you may find 9021-Station Copy (page 921) a handy time-saving tool. Options 2112-01: Automatic Handsfree (Auto Handsfree) Use this option to enable or disable Automatic Handsfree for the extension. Features •...
  • Page 766 21xx-Configuration 211x-Options 2112-Speaker Control • Yes (1) - Enabled Default • No (0) - Disabled 736 ◆ Station Options: 2101-2501 DSX Software Manual...

  • Page 767: 2112-04: Voice Announcements In Headset Mode

    21xx-Configuration 211x-Options 2112-Speaker Control 2112-04: Voice Announcements in Headset Mode (Headset V.A.) Use this option to enable or disable incoming voice-announced Intercom calls while the extension is in the headset mode. If enable, the user hears 2 beeps in the headset when they receive an incoming Intercom call. If disabled, the user hears ringing over the telephone speaker.

  • Page 768: 2113-Groups

    21xx-Configuration 211x-Options 2113-Groups 2113-Groups Description Use this program to assign the various groups to which the station (extension) belongs. If programming multiple extensions, you may find 9021-Station Copy (page 921) a handy time-saving tool. Options 2113-01: Dial 9 Group (Dial 9 Group) Assign the line group (90-98) the extension accesses when the user dials 9 for an outside line or presses a Switched Loop key.

  • Page 769: 2113-03: Pickup Group

    21xx-Configuration 211x-Options 2113-Groups 2113-03: Pickup Group (Pickup Group) Use this option to assign the extension to a Pickup Group. Features • Group Call Pickup (page 184) IntraMail Features • None Options • (pickup groups 1-8) • (unassigned) Default • Station Options: 2101-2501 ◆ 739 DSX Software Manual...

  • Page 770: 2113-04: Privacy Group

    21xx-Configuration 211x-Options 2113-Groups 2113-04: Privacy Group (Privacy Group) Use this option to assign an extension to a Privacy Release Group. Features • Privacy Release Groups (page 278) IntraMail Features • None Options • 1 - 16 for Privacy Release Groups 1-16 •...

  • Page 771: 2114-Off Hook Options

    21xx-Configuration 211x-Options 2114-Off Hook Options 2114-Off Hook Options Description Used this program to customize the off-hook options for the station (extension). If programming multiple extensions, you may find 9021-Station Copy (page 921) a handy time-saving tool. Options 2114-01: Prime Line Type (Prime Line Type) Use this option to set the extension’s Prime Line type (none, key, line, or Line Group).

  • Page 772: 2114-01: Prime Line Group

    21xx-Configuration 211x-Options 2114-Off Hook Options Options • 1-64 (lines 1-64) Default • 1 2114-01: Prime Line Group (Prime Line Group) If 2114-01: Prime Line Type is set for line (3), use this option to select the Line Group the extension seizes when the user lifts the handset.

  • Page 773: 2114-02: Station Ring Down Type

    21xx-Configuration 211x-Options 2114-Off Hook Options 2114-02: Station Ring Down Type (Ring Down Type) Use this option to set the extension’s Ring Down type (none, extension, System Speed Dial, or Personal Speed Dial). Features • Cordless Telephone (page 94) • Ringdown Extension (page 293) IntraMail Features •...

  • Page 774: 2114-03: Station's Operator Extension Number

    21xx-Configuration 211x-Options 2114-Off Hook Options 2114-03: Station’s Operator Extension Number (Operator Ext) Assign the extension’s operator. This is the co-worker the extension user reaches when they dial 0. Features • Attendant Position (page 24) IntraMail Features • None Options • Extension number •...

  • Page 775: 2115-Hunting And Overflow Options

    21xx-Configuration 211x-Options 2115-Hunting and Overflow Options 2115-Hunting and Overflow Options Description Use this program to set the Extension Hunting and DID Intercept options for the extension (station). If programming multiple extensions, you may find 9021-Station Copy (page 921) a handy time-saving tool. Sample Hunt Group Programming Circular Hunting Circular Hunting Programming (for 301, 303 and 304)

  • Page 776: 2115-01: Hunt Type

    21xx-Configuration 211x-Options 2115-Hunting and Overflow Options UCD Hunting UCD Hunting Programming (for 301, 303 and 304 with master 701) 2115-01: Hunt Type Enter the Hunt Type 5 for all three extensions. 2115-01: UCD Group Master Enter 701 for all three extensions. Number 2302-01: UCD Group Overflow Enter 305...
  • Page 777 21xx-Configuration 211x-Options 2115-Hunting and Overflow Options Features • Extension Hunting (page 154) IntraMail Features • None Options • (UCD Group 1) through (UCD Group 8) • (entered by pressing None CLEAR Default • None Station Options: 2101-2501 ◆ 747 DSX Software Manual...

  • Page 778: 2115-02: Did Station Intercept Type

    21xx-Configuration 211x-Options 2115-Hunting and Overflow Options 2115-02: DID Station Intercept Type (DID Intercept Type) Use this option to set the extension’s DID Intercept type. Intercept can occur when the extension is busy, in Do Not Disturb, or unanswered. Features • Direct Inward Dialing (page 99) IntraMail Features •...

  • Page 779: 2116-Off Hook Signaling Options

    21xx-Configuration 211x-Options 2116-Off Hook Signaling Options 2116-Off Hook Signaling Options Description Use this program to set the station (extension) Off-Hook Signaling options. If programming multiple extensions, you may find 9021-Station Copy (page 921) a handy time-saving tool. Options 2116-01: Off Hook Signaling for Incoming Intercom Calls (OHS Intercom) Use this option to assign an extension’s Off-Hook Signaling mode for incoming Intercom calls.

  • Page 780: 2116-03: Off Hook Signaling For Incoming Outside Calls

    21xx-Configuration 211x-Options 2116-Off Hook Signaling Options 2116-03: Off Hook Signaling for Incoming Outside Calls (OHS Lines) To have the system audibly alert the operator when outside calls are waiting, assign an extension’s Off-Hook Signaling options for outside calls (no Off-Hook Signaling, Call Wait beeps over speaker, or Off-hook ringing). Features •...

  • Page 781: 2117-Call Logging (Caller Id Logging)

    21xx-Configuration 211x-Options 2117-Call Logging (Caller ID Logging) 2117-Call Logging (Caller ID Logging) Description Use this program to set up Caller ID Logging at the extension (station). If programming multiple extensions, you may find 9021-Station Copy (page 921) a handy time-saving tool. Options 2117-01: Caller ID Log Type (CID Log Type)

  • Page 782: 2117-01: Caller Id Log Group

    21xx-Configuration 211x-Options 2117-Call Logging (Caller ID Logging) 2117-01: Caller ID Log Group (CID Log Group) If 2117-01: Caller ID Log Type is 2 (group), use this option to specify to which Caller ID Logging Group the extension belongs. Features • Caller ID Logging (page 68) IntraMail Features •...

  • Page 783: 212X-Keys

    21xx-Configuration 212x-Keys 2121-Feature Keys 212x-Keys 2121-Feature Keys Description Use this program to assign the Feature Keys on a keyset. The defaults are as follows: In DSX-80/160, keys 1-12 are line keys for lines 1-12 and keys 13-24 are undefined. ❥ In DSX-40, keys 1-8 are line keys for lines 1-8 and keys 9-24 are undefined.
  • Page 784 21xx-Configuration 212x-Keys 2121-Feature Keys Extension Feature Key Assignments (Page 2 of 5) Key Type Description Key Code and Data Operation Use this option to assign a Feature Key as a 05 + nnn (extension • Press key to call Hotline number) Hotline key.
  • Page 785 21xx-Configuration 212x-Keys 2121-Feature Keys (Page 3 of 5) Extension Feature Key Assignments Key Type Description Key Code and Data Operation Use this option to assign a Feature Key as a 10 + nn (Pickup • Press key to answer Group Pickup No Group 01-16) Ring lamp only (no ring) Group Call Pickup key.
  • Page 786 21xx-Configuration 212x-Keys 2121-Feature Keys Extension Feature Key Assignments (Page 4 of 5) Key Type Description Key Code and Data Operation Use this option to assign a Feature Key as a 18 + CLEAR • Press key to put Key Night (System Night key) Night key.
  • Page 787 21xx-Configuration 212x-Keys 2121-Feature Keys (Page 5 of 5) Extension Feature Key Assignments Key Type Description Key Code and Data Operation Use this option to assign a Feature Key as a While on a call: Save Number Dialed Save Number Dialed key. •...

  • Page 788: 2121-[01 To 24]: Feature Key Codes

    21xx-Configuration 212x-Keys 2121-Feature Keys Options 2121-[01 to 24]: Feature Key Codes (Key xx Type) Use this option to enter the key codes for an extension’s Feature Keys. Refer to Extension Feature Key Assignments (page 753) for the specifics. Features • Refer to Extension Feature Key Assignments (page 753). IntraMail Features •...

  • Page 789: 2122-Ring Override (Key Ring Override)

    21xx-Configuration 212x-Keys 2122-Ring Override (Key Ring Override) 2122-Ring Override (Key Ring Override) Description Use this program to set up Distinctive Ringing Key Ring Override at the extension (station). If programming multiple extensions, you may find 9021-Station Copy (page 921) a handy time-saving tool. Options 2122-[01 to 24]: Key Ring Override (Key xx Ring)

  • Page 790: 2123-Blf (Dss Keys)

    21xx-Configuration 212x-Keys 2123-BLF (DSS Keys) 2123-BLF (DSS Keys) Description Use this program to set up the station (extension) DSS/BLF keys. If programming multiple extensions, you may find 9021-Station Copy (page 921) a handy time-saving tool. Options 2123-[01-24]: DSS/BLF Key Assignments (Key xx Type) Use this option to program an extension’s DSS keys.

  • Page 791: 2124-Soft Keys (Idle Menu Soft Keys For Super Display)

    21xx-Configuration 212x-Keys 2124-Soft Keys (Idle Menu Soft Keys for Super Display) 2124-Soft Keys (Idle Menu Soft Keys for Super Display) Description Use this program to customize the Super Display Telephone idle menu soft keys. If programming multiple extensions, you may find 9021-Station Copy (page 921) a handy time-saving tool. Options 2124-[01-12]: Idle Menu Soft Key Assignments (Super Display) (xx Key xx Type)
  • Page 792 21xx-Configuration 212x-Keys 2124-Soft Keys (Idle Menu Soft Keys for Super Display) Super Display Telephone Idle Menu Soft Key Options (Page 2 of 2) Entry Display Description Press to directly access System Speed Dial Directory Dialing. COMPANY Press to program the following: PROGRAM •...

  • Page 793: 213X-Access

    21xx-Configuration 213x-Access 2131-Lines 213x-Access 2131-Lines Description Use this program to set up the station (extension) access to outside lines. If programming multiple extensions, you may find 9021-Station Copy (page 921) a handy time-saving tool. Options 2131-[01-64]: Line Access (xx Line xx Access) Use this option to set the extension’s access options for lines (no access, incoming only, outgoing only, or full access).

  • Page 794: 2132-Ringing

    21xx-Configuration 213x-Access 2132-Ringing 2132-Ringing Description Use this program to set up the station (extension) ringing for outside lines. If programming multiple extensions, you may find 9021-Station Copy (page 921) a handy time-saving tool. Options 2132-[01-64]: Line Ringing (xx Line xx Ring) Use this option to set the extension’s ringing assignments for lines (lamp only, day and night ringing, night ringing only, and delay ringing day and night).

  • Page 795: 2133-Line Groups

    21xx-Configuration 213x-Access 2133-Line Groups 2133-Line Groups Description Use this option to set the station (extension) access to Line Groups 90-98. If programming multiple extensions, you may find 9021-Station Copy (page 921) a handy time-saving tool. Options 2133-[01-64]: Line Group Access (xx Group xx Access) Use this option to enable or disable the extension’s outgoing access to each Line Group (90-98).

  • Page 796: 214X-Intramail (Station Mailbox)

    21xx-Configuration 214x-IntraMail (Station Mailbox) 2141-Type 214x-IntraMail (Station Mailbox) 2141-Type Description Use this program to assign the station (extension) mailbox type. If programming multiple extensions, you may find 9021-Station Copy (page 921) a handy time-saving tool. Options 2141-01: Station Mailbox Type (Mailbox Type) Use this option to set the extension’s mailbox type.

  • Page 797: 2142-Setup

    21xx-Configuration 214x-IntraMail (Station Mailbox) 2142-Setup 2142-Setup Description Use this program to set up the Station Mailbox. If programming multiple extensions, you may find 9021-Station Copy (page 921) a handy time-saving tool. Options 2142-01: Number of Messages (# of Messages) Use this option to set the maximum number of messages that can be left in the Subscriber Mailbox. If a caller tries to leave a message once this limit is reached, they hear, “That mailbox is full.”...

  • Page 798: 2142-04: Station Mailbox Voice Prompt Language

    21xx-Configuration 214x-IntraMail (Station Mailbox) 2142-Setup Options • No (0) - Disabled • Yes (1) - Enabled Default • No (0) - Disabled 2142-04: Station Mailbox Voice Prompt Language (Voice Prompts) Use this option to set the Station Mailbox voice prompt language. You can choose either the Primary Lan- guage or the Secondary Language.

  • Page 799: 2143-Options

    21xx-Configuration 214x-IntraMail (Station Mailbox) 2143-Options 2143-Options Description Use this program to customize various Station Mailbox options. If programming multiple extensions, you may find 9021-Station Copy (page 921) a handy time-saving tool. Options 2143-01: Message Playback Order (Playback Order) Use this option to set the Subscriber Mailbox message playback order. When a subscriber listens to their messages, IntraMail can play the oldest messages first (first-in-first-out, or FIFO), or the newest messages first (last-in-first-out, or LIFO).
  • Page 800 21xx-Configuration 214x-IntraMail (Station Mailbox) 2143-Options Options • No (0) - Disabled • Yes (1) - Enabled Default • No (0) - Disabled 770 ◆ Station Options: 2101-2501 DSX Software Manual...

  • Page 801: 2143-04: Message Waiting Lamp

    21xx-Configuration 214x-IntraMail (Station Mailbox) 2143-Options 2143-04: Message Waiting Lamp (MW Lamp) Use this option to enable or disable Message Waiting lamping at the extension associated with the Sub- scriber mailbox. For Subscriber Mailboxes, you should leave this option enabled. For Guest Mailboxes, you should leave this option disabled.

  • Page 802: 2144-Auto-Attendant (Automated Attendant)

    21xx-Configuration 214x-IntraMail (Station Mailbox) 2144-Auto-Attendant (Automated Attendant) 2144-Auto-Attendant (Automated Attendant) Description Use this program to set up the Automated Attendant options for the Station Mailbox. If programming multiple extensions, you may find 9021-Station Copy (page 921) a handy time-saving tool. Options 2144-01: Auto Attendant Do Not Disturb (Auto-Att DND)
  • Page 803 21xx-Configuration 214x-IntraMail (Station Mailbox) 2144-Auto-Attendant (Automated Attendant) IntraMail Features • Next Call Routing Mailbox (page 552) Options • (0) - Disabled • (1) - Enabled Default • (0) - Disabled Station Options: 2101-2501 ◆ 773 DSX Software Manual...

  • Page 804: 2144-04: Next Call Routing Mailbox

    21xx-Configuration 214x-IntraMail (Station Mailbox) 2144-Auto-Attendant (Automated Attendant) 2144-04: Next Call Routing Mailbox (Next CRMB) Use this option to assign a Next Call Routing Mailbox to the Subscriber Mailbox. This provides callers with additional dialing options while listening to a Subscriber Mailbox recorded or default greeting. The digits the caller can dial depends on the setting of the Next Call Routing Mailbox and Dialing Option options.

  • Page 805: 215X-Speed Dial (Personal)

    21xx-Configuration 215x-Speed Dial (Personal) 2151-Assignment (Personal Speed Dial Bin Assignment) 215x-Speed Dial (Personal) 2151-Assignment (Personal Speed Dial Bin Assignment) Description Use this option to enter an extension’s Personal Speed Dial numbers from system programming. If programming multiple extensions, you may find 9021-Station Copy (page 921) a handy time-saving tool. Options 2151-[01-20]: Personal Speed Dial Bin Type (xx Bin xx Type)

  • Page 806: [01-20]: Personal Speed Dial Bin Number

    21xx-Configuration 215x-Speed Dial (Personal) 2151-Assignment (Personal Speed Dial Bin Assignment) • Speed Dial (page 315) IntraMail Features • None Options • 90-98 for Line Groups 90-98 Default • No entry 2151-[01-20]: Personal Speed Dial Bin Number (xx Bin xx Number) Use this option to enter the Personal Speed Dial number (normally up to 16 characters).

  • Page 807: [01-20]: Personal Speed Dial Bin Name

    21xx-Configuration 215x-Speed Dial (Personal) 2151-Assignment (Personal Speed Dial Bin Assignment) 2151-[01-20]: Personal Speed Dial Bin Name (xx Bin xx Name) Use this option to enter a name (up to 16 characters) for the Personal Speed Dial bin. When entering names, use the following Name Programming chart.
  • Page 808 21xx-Configuration 215x-Speed Dial (Personal) 2151-Assignment (Personal Speed Dial Bin Assignment) Features • Call Forwarding Off Premises (page 51) • Directory Dialing (page 131) IntraMail Features • None Options • Alpha-numeric characters (16 max.). See Name Programming Chart above. Default • None 778 ◆...

  • Page 809: 22Xx-Ring Groups

    22xx-Ring Groups 220x-Setup 2201-Identification 22xx-Ring Groups 220x-Setup 2201-Identification Description For each Ring Group, use this program to specify the Ring Group name and Ring Type. Options 2201-01: Ring Group Name (Name) Use this option to enter a name (up to 16 characters) for the Ring Group. When entering names, use the fol- lowing Name Programming chart.

  • Page 810: 2201-02: Ring Group Incoming Ring Type

    22xx-Ring Groups 220x-Setup 2201-Identification Features • Directory Dialing (page 131) • Group Ring (page 189) IntraMail Features • None Options • Alpha-numeric characters (16 max.). See Name Programming Chart above. 2201-02: Ring Group Incoming Ring Type (Ring Type) Use this option to assign a ring type to calls ringing the Ring Group master number. When an extension in the Ring Group rings, it uses the ring type specified in this option.

  • Page 811: 221X-Intramail (Ring Group Mailbox)

    22xx-Ring Groups 221x-IntraMail (Ring Group Mailbox) 2211-Type 221x-IntraMail (Ring Group Mailbox) 2211-Type Description Use this program to set the Ring Group Mailbox type. Options 2211-01: Mailbox Type (Mailbox Type) Use this option to set the Ring Group Mailbox type (Subscriber or Routing). Features •...

  • Page 812: 2212-Setup

    22xx-Ring Groups 221x-IntraMail (Ring Group Mailbox) 2212-Setup 2212-Setup Description Use this program to set up the Ring Group Mailbox. Options 2212-01: Number of Messages (# of Messages) Use this option to set the maximum number of messages that can be left in the Subscriber Mailbox. If a caller tries to leave a message once this limit is reached, they hear, “That mailbox is full.”...

  • Page 813: 2212-04: Ring Group Mailbox Voice Prompt Language

    22xx-Ring Groups 221x-IntraMail (Ring Group Mailbox) 2212-Setup Options • (0) - Disabled • (1) - Enabled Default • (0) - Disabled 2212-04: Ring Group Mailbox Voice Prompt Language (Voice Prompts) Use this option to set the Ring Group Mailbox voice prompt language. You can choose either the Primary Language or the Secondary Language.

  • Page 814: 2213-Options

    22xx-Ring Groups 221x-IntraMail (Ring Group Mailbox) 2213-Options 2213-Options Description Use this program to customize various Ring Group Mailbox options. Options 2213-01: Message Playback Order (Playback Order)ƒ Use this option to set the Subscriber Mailbox message playback order. When a subscriber listens to their messages, IntraMail can play the oldest messages first (first-in-first-out, or FIFO), or the newest messages first (last-in-first-out, or LIFO).

  • Page 815: 2213-03: Auto Time Stamp

    22xx-Ring Groups 221x-IntraMail (Ring Group Mailbox) 2213-Options 2213-03: Auto Time Stamp (Auto Time Stamp) Use this option to enable or disable Auto Time Stamp for the Subscriber Mailbox. If enabled, after the sub- scriber listens to a message IntraMail will announce the time and date the message was left. Auto Time Stamp will also announce the message sender (if known).

  • Page 816: 2213-05: Recording Conversation Beep

    22xx-Ring Groups 221x-IntraMail (Ring Group Mailbox) 2213-Options 2213-05: Recording Conversation Beep (Rec Conv Beep) Use this option to enable or disable the Conversation Record beep. If enabled, all parties on a call will hear the voice prompt “Recording” followed by a beep when the extension user initiates Conversation Record. If disabled, the voice prompt will not occur.

  • Page 817: 2214-Auto-Attendant (Automated Attendant)

    22xx-Ring Groups 221x-IntraMail (Ring Group Mailbox) 2214-Auto-Attendant (Automated Attendant) 2214-Auto-Attendant (Automated Attendant) Description Use this program to set up the Automated Attendant options for the Ring Group Mailbox. Options 2214-01: Auto Attendant Do Not Disturb (Auto-Att DND) Use this option to enable or disable Auto Attendant Do Not Disturb. When a subscriber enables Auto Atten- dant Do Not Disturb, an Automated Attendant caller will route directly to the mailbox, hear the greeting, and be asked to leave a message.

  • Page 818: 2214-03: Dialing Option

    22xx-Ring Groups 221x-IntraMail (Ring Group Mailbox) 2214-Auto-Attendant (Automated Attendant) 2214-03: Dialing Option (Dialing Option) Dialing Option provides additional dialing options for Next Call Routing Mailbox calls (see 2214-04: Next Call Routing Mailbox below). If enabled, a caller who accesses the Subscriber Mailbox to leave a message can dial any of the options in the Next Call Routing Mailbox’s Dial Action Table.

  • Page 819: 2214-05: Directory List Number

    22xx-Ring Groups 221x-IntraMail (Ring Group Mailbox) 2214-Auto-Attendant (Automated Attendant) 2214-05: Directory List Number (Directory List) Use this option to specify the Directory List to which the Subscriber Mailbox belongs. When setting up Directory Dialing Mailboxes, you must specify which Directory List you want the Directory Dialing Mail- box to use.

  • Page 820: 23Xx-Ucd Groups

    23xx-UCD Groups 230x-Setup 2301-Identification 23xx-UCD Groups 230x-Setup 2301-Identification Description For each UCD Group, use this program to specify the UCD Group name and Ring Type. Options 2301-01: UCD Group Name (Name) Use this option to enter a name (up to 16 characters) for the UCD Group. When entering names, use the fol- lowing Name Programming chart.

  • Page 821: 2301-02: Ucd Group Incoming Ring Type

    23xx-UCD Groups 230x-Setup 2301-Identification Features • Directory Dialing (page 131) IntraMail Features • None Options • (16 max.). See Name Programming Chart above. Alpha-numeric characters 2301-02: UCD Group Incoming Ring Type (Ring Type) Use this option to assign a ring type to calls ringing the UCD Group master number. When an extension in the UCD Group rings, it uses the ring type specified in this option.

  • Page 822: 2302-Options

    23xx-UCD Groups 230x-Setup 2302-Options 2302-Options Description Use this program to specify the UCD Group overflow destination. Options 2302-01: UCD Group Overflow Destination (Overflow Dest) Use this option to assign the UCD Group overflow destination. Features • Extension Hunting (page 154) •...

  • Page 823: 231X-Intramail (Ucd Group Mailbox)

    23xx-UCD Groups 231x-IntraMail (UCD Group Mailbox) 2311-Type 231x-IntraMail (UCD Group Mailbox) 2311-Type Description Use this program to set the UCD Group Mailbox type. Options 2311-01: UCD Group Mailbox Type (Mailbox Type) Use this option to set the UCD Group Mailbox type (Subscriber or Routing). Features •...

  • Page 824: 2312-Setup

    23xx-UCD Groups 231x-IntraMail (UCD Group Mailbox) 2312-Setup 2312-Setup Description Use this program to set up the UCD Group Mailbox. Options 2312-01: Number of Messages (# of Messages) Use this option to set the maximum number of messages that can be left in the Subscriber Mailbox. If a caller tries to leave a message once this limit is reached, they hear, “That mailbox is full.”...

  • Page 825: 2312-04: Ucd Group Mailbox Voice Prompt Language

    23xx-UCD Groups 231x-IntraMail (UCD Group Mailbox) 2312-Setup Options • (0) - Disabled • (1) - Enabled Default • (0) - Disabled 2312-04: UCD Group Mailbox Voice Prompt Language (Voice Prompts) Use this option to set the UCD Group Mailbox voice prompt language. You can choose either the Primary Language or the Secondary Language.

  • Page 826: 2313-Playback

    23xx-UCD Groups 231x-IntraMail (UCD Group Mailbox) 2313-Playback 2313-Playback Description Use this program to customize various UCD Group Mailbox options. Options 2313-01: Message Playback Order (Playback Order) Use this option to set the Subscriber Mailbox message playback order. When a subscriber listens to their messages, IntraMail can play the oldest messages first (first-in-first-out, or FIFO), or the newest messages first (last-in-first-out, or LIFO).

  • Page 827: 2313-04: Message Waiting Lamp

    23xx-UCD Groups 231x-IntraMail (UCD Group Mailbox) 2313-Playback • Group Mailbox (page 497) Options • (0) - Disabled • (1) - Enabled Default • (0) - Disabled 2313-04: Message Waiting Lamp (MW Lamp) Use this option to enable or disable Message Waiting lamping at the extension associated with the Sub- scriber mailbox.

  • Page 828: 2314-(Auto-Attendant) Automated Attendant

    23xx-UCD Groups 231x-IntraMail (UCD Group Mailbox) 2314-(Auto-Attendant) Automated Attendant 2314-(Auto-Attendant) Automated Attendant Description Use this program to set up the Automated Attendant options for the UCD Group Mailbox. Options 2314-01: Auto Attendant Do Not Disturb (Auto-Att DND) Use this option to enable or disable Auto Attendant Do Not Disturb for the Hunt Group Mailbox. When a subscriber enables Auto Attendant Do Not Disturb, an Automated Attendant caller will route directly to the mailbox, hear the greeting, and be asked to leave a message.

  • Page 829: 2314-04: Next Call Routing Mailbox

    23xx-UCD Groups 231x-IntraMail (UCD Group Mailbox) 2314-(Auto-Attendant) Automated Attendant IntraMail Features • Group Mailbox (page 497) • Next Call Routing Mailbox (page 552) Options • (0) - Disabled • (1) - Enabled Default • (0) - Disabled 2314-04: Next Call Routing Mailbox (Next CRMB) Use this option to assign a Next Call Routing Mailbox to the Subscriber Mailbox.

  • Page 830: 24Xx-Dss Consoles

    24xx-DSS Consoles 240x-Setup 2401-Config (DSS Console Configuration) 24xx-DSS Consoles 240x-Setup 2401-Config (DSS Console Configuration) Description Use this program to designate an owner for each DSS Console. Options 2401-01: DSS Owner (DSS Owner) For each DSS Console, use this option to assign the console owner. The owner is the keyset using the DSS Console.

  • Page 831: 2402-Keys (Dss Console Keys)

    24xx-DSS Consoles 240x-Setup 2402-Keys (DSS Console Keys) 2402-Keys (DSS Console Keys) Description Use this program to designate the Feature Keys for each DSS Console. 2402-[01-60]: DSS Console Key Codes (Key xx Type) Use this option to enter the key codes for the DSS Console’s Feature Keys. Refer to DSS Console Feature Key Assignments (page 802) for the specifics.
  • Page 832 24xx-DSS Consoles 240x-Setup 2402-Keys (DSS Console Keys) The following chart shows the available DSS Console Feature Key assignments. DSS Console Feature Key Assignments (Page 1 of 4) Key Type Description Key Code and Data Operation Use this option to designate a Feature Key as Undefined undefined (no function).
  • Page 833 24xx-DSS Consoles 240x-Setup 2402-Keys (DSS Console Keys) (Page 2 of 4) DSS Console Feature Key Assignments Key Type Description Key Code and Data Operation Use this option to assign a Feature Key as a 07 + nnn (extension • Press key to call cov- Call Coverage No number) Ring...
  • Page 834 24xx-DSS Consoles 240x-Setup 2402-Keys (DSS Console Keys) DSS Console Feature Key Assignments (Page 3 of 4) Key Type Description Key Code and Data Operation Use this option to assign a Feature Key as a 14 + nnn (bin 001- • Press key to dial System Speed 999)
  • Page 835 24xx-DSS Consoles 240x-Setup 2402-Keys (DSS Console Keys) (Page 4 of 4) DSS Console Feature Key Assignments Key Type Description Key Code and Data Operation Use this option to assign a Feature Key as a 24 + nnn (extension • Press key to call Message Center number) (page 372)

  • Page 836: 25Xx-Text Messages (Selectable Display Messaging)

    25xx-Text Messages (Selectable Display Messaging) 250x-Setup 2501-Text 25xx-Text Messages (Selectable Display Messaging) 250x-Setup 2501-Text Description Use this program to customize the Selectable Display Messages. Options 2501-[01-16]: Selectable Display Messages (Message Text) Use this option to program the system’s 16 Selectable Display Messages. Each message can be up to 18 characters long, including any blank spaces you may want to add for readability.

  • Page 837: Name Programming Chart

    25xx-Text Messages (Selectable Display Messaging) 250x-Setup 2501-Text Option Default Message 16 Undefined (up to 18 characters) Name Programming Chart Name Programming Chart Press a key the indicated number of times for desired character 1 Time 2 Times 3 Times 4 Times 5 Times 6 Times 7 Times...
  • Page 838 25xx-Text Messages (Selectable Display Messaging) 250x-Setup 2501-Text 808 ◆ Station Options: 2101-2501 DSX Software Manual...

  • Page 839: Lines: 3101-3715

    31xx-Configuration 310x-Setup 3101-Type Lines: 3101-3715 31xx-Configuration 310x-Setup 3101-Type Description Use this program to set the line circuit type, name, PBX option, and E1 signaling (for Latin America instal- lations only). If programming multiple lines, you may find 9022-Line Copy (page 923) a handy time-saving tool. Options 3101-01: Line Type (Type)

  • Page 840: 3101-02: Line Name

    31xx-Configuration 310x-Setup 3101-Type 3101-02: Line Name (Name) Use this option to assign a name (up to 16 characters) to the line. Features • Names for Extensions and Lines (page 249) IntraMail Features • None Options • See the Name Programming Chart on the next page. Default •...

  • Page 841: 3101-03: Dtmf Dialing

    31xx-Configuration 310x-Setup 3101-Type 3101-03: DTMF Dialing (DTMF Dialing) Use this option to set the type of dialing used by the line (DTMF or Dial Pulse). Features • Central Office Calls, Answering (page 74) • Central Office Calls, Placing (page 78) •...

  • Page 842: 3101-06: Mfc Signaling Type

    31xx-Configuration 310x-Setup 3101-Type • 7 for Brazil #5 • 8 for Brazil #6 Default • 0 3101-06: MFC Signaling Type (MFC Signaling) For E1 lines only, use this option to specify the MFC Dialing Type. Features • N/A IntraMail Features •...

  • Page 843: 3102-Access

    31xx-Configuration 310x-Setup 3102-Access 3102-Access Description Use this program to set the line Class of Service and Toll Level. If programming multiple lines, you may find 9022-Line Copy (page 923) a handy time-saving tool. Options 3102-01: Line Class of Service (COS Level) Use this option to assign the line’s Class of Service.

  • Page 844: 3103-Settings

    31xx-Configuration 310x-Setup 3103-Settings 3103-Settings Description Use this program to customize basic settings for the line. If programming multiple lines, you may find 9022-Line Copy (page 923) a handy time-saving tool. Options 3103-01: Transmit Gain (Transmit Gain) Use this option to set the line’s transmit gain. This gain setting allows you to compensate for the transmit gain characteristics of the connected telco or PBX.

  • Page 845: 3103-03: Loop Length

    31xx-Configuration 310x-Setup 3103-Settings 3103-03: Loop Length (Loop Length) Use this option to compensate for a line’s loop length. Use the default option for normal installations. Use the short option only when the system is very close to the central office or behind a PBX. Use the long option when the loop length is abnormally long.

  • Page 846: 3103-04: Tandem Calls

    31xx-Configuration 310x-Setup 3103-Settings 3103-04: Tandem Calls (Tandem Calls) Use this option to enable or disable Tandem Calls for the line. Enable Tandem Calls for lines if Off Premises Call Forwarding should be able to route incoming calls to an off-premises location. The originating line (i.e., the line that Off Premises Call Forwarding will reroute) must have this option enabled.

  • Page 847: 311X-Options

    31xx-Configuration 311x-Options 3111-Features 311x-Options 3111-Features Description Use this program to enable or disable various line features. If programming multiple lines, you may find 9022-Line Copy (page 923) a handy time-saving tool. Options 3111-01: Disable Forced Account Codes (Disable Forced AC) Use this option to enable or disable Forced Account Codes for an individual line.

  • Page 848: 3111-04: Enable Mfc Group B

    31xx-Configuration 311x-Options 3111-Features • Yes (1) - Enabled Default • Yes (1) - Enabled 3111-04: Enable MFC Group B (MFC Group B) For E1 lines only, use this option to enable or disable the MFC Dialing Group B supervisory signaling. Since not all central offices provide Group B signaling, set this option for compatibility with the connected telco.

  • Page 849: 3112-Termination

    31xx-Configuration 311x-Options 3112-Termination 3112-Termination Description Use this program to set the line termination options. If programming multiple lines, you may find 9022-Line Copy (page 923) a handy time-saving tool. Options 3112-01: Direct Termination in the Day (Day Termination) Use this option to set the day termination (answering point) for the line. If the line is a Direct Inward Line, it rings the answering point directly during the day.

  • Page 850: 3112-03: Day Overflow Destination

    31xx-Configuration 311x-Options 3112-Termination 3112-03: Day Overflow Destination (Day Ovfl Destination) Use this option to set the overflow destination for day mode calls (including DILs). The destination can be an extension, UCD Group master number, voice mail master number, Ring Group master number, or Key Ring (by pressing CLEAR).

  • Page 851: 3112-06: Night Overflow Destination

    31xx-Configuration 311x-Options 3112-Termination • Voice Mail (page 372) IntraMail Features • Voice Mail Overflow (page 590) Options • (0) - Disabled • (1) - Enabled Default • (0) - Disabled 3112-06: Night Overflow Destination (Night Ovfl Destination) Use this option to set the overflow destination for night mode calls (including DILs). The destination can be an extension, UCD Group master number, voice mail master number, Ring Group master number, or Key Ring (by pressing CLEAR).

  • Page 852: 3113-Ringing

    31xx-Configuration 311x-Options 3113-Ringing 3113-Ringing Description Use this program to set the line Pickup Group assignment and ring types. If programming multiple lines, you may find 9022-Line Copy (page 923) a handy time-saving tool. Options 3113-01: Pickup Group Assignment (Pickup Group) Use this option to have an incoming call on the line ring all the extensions in the assigned pickup group.

  • Page 853: 3113-03: Night Ring Type

    31xx-Configuration 311x-Options 3113-Ringing 3113-03: Night Ring Type (Night Ring Type) Use this option to assign a ring type (A, B, or C) for the line’s night ringing. When the line rings an extension in the night ring mode, it uses the ring type specified in this option. Features •...

  • Page 854: 3113-04: Delay Ring Type

    31xx-Configuration 311x-Options 3113-Ringing 3113-04: Delay Ring Type (Delay Ring Type) Use this option to assign a ring type (A, B, or C) for the line’s delay ringing. When the line rings an exten- sion in the delay ring mode, it uses the ring type specified in this option. Features •...

  • Page 855: 312X-Caller Id

    31xx-Configuration 312x-Caller ID 3121-Settings 312x-Caller ID 3121-Settings Description Use this program to set the line Caller ID parameters. If programming multiple lines, you may find 9022-Line Copy (page 923) a handy time-saving tool. Options 3121-01: Caller ID Type (CID Type) Use this option to enable Caller ID for each line.

  • Page 856: 3121-03: Ani/Dnis Delimiter

    31xx-Configuration 312x-Caller ID 3121-Settings Options • 0 for none • 1 for ANI • 2 for *ANI* • 3 for *DNIS* • 4 for *ANI*DNIS* Default • 0 3121-03: ANI/DNIS Delimiter (ANI/DNIS Delimiter) For ANI/DNIS format options 2-4 (see 3121-02: ANI/DNIS Format above), use this option to set the type of data delimiter provided by the telco.

  • Page 857: 3122-Groups

    31xx-Configuration 312x-Caller ID 3122-Groups 3122-Groups Description Use this program to specify to which Caller ID Groups the line belongs. If programming multiple lines, you may find 9022-Line Copy (page 923) a handy time-saving tool. Options 3122-[01-08]: Caller ID Group Membership (xx CID Group x) Use this option to indicate into which Caller ID Logging Group the line should log its calls.

  • Page 858: 313X-Voice Mail

    31xx-Configuration 313x-Voice Mail 3131-Settings 313x-Voice Mail 3131-Settings Description For each line, use this program to set the voice mail Caller ID option and IntraMail Answer Table. If programming multiple lines, you may find 9022-Line Copy (page 923) a handy time-saving tool. Options 3131-01: Pass Caller ID to Voice Mail (Pass CID to VM)

  • Page 859: 3131-03: Line Voice Prompt Language

    31xx-Configuration 313x-Voice Mail 3131-Settings 3131-03: Line Voice Prompt Language (Voice Prompts) Use this option to set the line voice prompt language. You can choose either the Primary Language or the Secondary Language. To activate a different primary or Secondary Language, see 4203-Voice Prompts (Active System Voice Prompt Languages) (page 879).

  • Page 860: 314X-Tie Line

    31xx-Configuration 314x-TIE Line 3141-Dialing 314x-TIE Line 3141-Dialing Description For each tie line, use this program to select the line’s dial 9 group and operator extension. If programming multiple lines, you may find 9022-Line Copy (page 923) a handy time-saving tool. Options 3141-01: Tie Line Caller’s Outbound Dial 9 Group (Dial 9 Group)

  • Page 861: 3142-Line Access

    31xx-Configuration 314x-TIE Line 3142-Line Access 3142-Line Access Description Use this program to set the tie line outbound line access. If programming multiple lines, you may find 9022-Line Copy (page 923) a handy time-saving tool. Options 3142-[01-64]: Tie Line Caller’s Outbound Line Access (Line xx Access) Use this option to set up a line access matrix between each Tie Line in the local system and each outgoing line in the local system.

  • Page 862: 3143-Group Access

    31xx-Configuration 314x-TIE Line 3143-Group Access 3143-Group Access Description Use this program to set the tie line outbound Line Group access. If programming multiple lines, you may find 9022-Line Copy (page 923) a handy time-saving tool. Options 3143-[01-64]: Tie Line Caller’s Outbound Line Group Access (xx Group xx Access) Use this option to enable or disable the extension’s outgoing access to each Line Group (90-98).

  • Page 863: 32Xx-Groups

    32xx-Groups 320x-Setup 3201-Order 32xx-Groups 320x-Setup 3201-Order Description Use this program to set up Line Groups. Options 3201-[01-64]: Line Group (xx 1st line) Use this option to program lines (1-64) into each of the nine Line Groups (90-98). The order in which you enter lines into a group determines the order in which the system will access the lines when placing an out- side call.

  • Page 864: 33Xx-Did (Direct Inward Dialing)

    33xx-DID (Direct Inward Dialing) 330x-Setup 3301-Options 33xx-DID (Direct Inward Dialing) 330x-Setup 3301-Options Description Use this program to specify the number of DID digits expected from the telco. Options 3301-01: Number of DID Digits (# DID Digits) Use this option to specify the number of incoming DID digits expected from the telco. This entry should match the type of DID service the telco provides.

  • Page 865: 3302-Translations

    33xx-DID (Direct Inward Dialing) 330x-Setup 3302-Translations 3302-Translations Description Use this program to set up the system’s DID routing. The DID Translation Table analyzes the DID string received from the telco and routes it to the corresponding extension. You make separate day and night rout- ing entries.

  • Page 866: 3302-01: Incoming Did Digits

    33xx-DID (Direct Inward Dialing) 330x-Setup 3302-Translations Ranges and Exceptions – Incorrect Configuration Table Entry Digits Received Day Route Night Route • In the day, all calls in the 3xx range route to their respective extensions. The day mode exception rout- ing for 301 and 302 is ignored.

  • Page 867: 3302-01: Mfc Category

    33xx-DID (Direct Inward Dialing) 330x-Setup 3302-Translations • (wild card representing any digit) Default • for entry 001. All other table entries blank. 3302-01: MFC Category (MFC Category) For E1 lines only, use this option to set the MFC Dialing Category for each DID Table entry. This option is not used in North America.

  • Page 868: 34Xx-Pbx

    34xx-PBX 340x-Setup 3401-Codes 34xx-PBX 340x-Setup 3401-Codes Description Use this program to set up the PBX Access Codes Table. Options 3401-01: PBX Access Code Digits (PBX Access Digits) Use this option to enter codes into the PBX Access Codes Table. You can enter up to 10 PBX Access Codes. Each code is either 1 or 2 digits long, using the digits 0-9 and #.

  • Page 869: 35Xx-Toll Restriction

    35xx-Toll Restriction 350x-Setup 3501-Type 35xx-Toll Restriction 350x-Setup 3501-Type Description Use this program to set the Toll Restriction country type and enter additional emergency numbers. Options 3501-01: Toll Restriction Country Type (Toll Restrict Type) Use this option to set the Toll Restriction country type. You should select US Domestic (1) for systems installed in North America.

  • Page 870: 351X-Options

    35xx-Toll Restriction 351x-Options 3511-Settings 351x-Options 3511-Settings Description Use this program to enable or disable Active Key Pad (continuous dialing). Options 3511-01: Active Key Pad (Active Dial Pad) Use this option to enable or disable Active Key Pad (continuous dialing) for outside calls. Features •...

  • Page 871: 3512-U.s. Dialing

    35xx-Toll Restriction 351x-Options 3512-U.S. Dialing 3512-U.S. Dialing Description Use this program to enable or disable the following types of dialing: • 0 + XXX Operator Assisted Dialing • 011 + XXX International Dialing • 101x Equal Access Dialing • Allow N11 Dialing Options 3512-01: Allow 0 + XXX Operator Assisted Dialing (0+XXX)

  • Page 872: 3512-04: Allow N11 Dialing

    35xx-Toll Restriction 351x-Options 3512-U.S. Dialing Options • No (0) - Disabled • Yes (1) - Enabled Default • Yes (1) - Enabled 3512-04: Allow N11 Dialing (Allow N11) Use this option to enable or disable dialing N11 services such as directory assistance (411) and repair (611). This option does not restrict 911 or 1 + 911 calls.

  • Page 873: 3513-International Dialing

    35xx-Toll Restriction 351x-Options 3513-International Dialing 3513-International Dialing Description This program is not applicable to systems installed in North America. Line Options: 3101-3714 ◆ 843 DSX Software Manual...

  • Page 874: 352X-1010-Xxx / Local Xxx (Equal Access Dialing)

    35xx-Toll Restriction 352x-1010-XXX / Local XXX (Equal Access Dialing) 3521-Table Options 352x-1010-XXX / Local XXX (Equal Access Dialing) 3521-Table Options Description Use this program to set up the 1010 + XXX Equal Access Dialing Table. By default, this type of dialing is enabled because the 1010 + XXX Equal Access Dialing Table is a deny table with no entries (i.e., it denies nothing).

  • Page 875: 3522-Table Entries

    35xx-Toll Restriction 352x-1010-XXX / Local XXX (Equal Access Dialing) 3522-Table Entries 3522-Table Entries 3522-xx: Table Data (Dial Code) Use this option to enter data into the 1010 + Equal Access Dialing Table. You can enter up to 96 codes. Features •...

  • Page 876: 353X-1+Xxx / Tbl-A Xxx (Npa/Nxx Dialing 3-Digit Table)

    35xx-Toll Restriction 353x-1+XXX / TBL-A XXX (NPA/NXX Dialing 3-Digit Table) 3531-Table Options 353x-1+XXX / TBL-A XXX (NPA/NXX Dialing 3-Digit Table) 3531-Table Options Description Use this program to set up the 1 + NPA/NXX Dialing 3-Digit Table. By default, this type of dialing is enabled because the 1 + NPA/NXX Dialing 3-Digit Table is a deny table with no entries (i.e., it denies nothing).

  • Page 877: 3532-Table Entries

    35xx-Toll Restriction 353x-1+XXX / TBL-A XXX (NPA/NXX Dialing 3-Digit Table) 3532-Table Entries 3532-Table Entries 3532-xx: Table Data (Dial Code) Use this option to enter data into the 1 + NPA/NXX Dialing 3-Digit Table. You can enter up to 96 codes. Features •...

  • Page 878: 354X-1+Xxx-Xxx / Tbl-A Xxxxxxx (1 + Npa + Nxx Dialing 6-Digit Table)

    35xx-Toll Restriction 354x-1+XXX-XXX / TBL-A XXXXXXX (1 + NPA + NXX Dialing 6-Digit Table) 3541-Table Options 354x-1+XXX-XXX / TBL-A XXXXXXX (1 + NPA + NXX Dialing 6-Digit Table) 3541-Table Options Description Use this program to set up the 1 + NPA + NXX Dialing 6-Digit Table. By default, this type of dialing is enabled because the 1 + NPA + NXX Dialing 6-Digit Table is a deny table with no entries (i.e., it denies nothing).

  • Page 879: 3542-Table Entries

    35xx-Toll Restriction 354x-1+XXX-XXX / TBL-A XXXXXXX (1 + NPA + NXX Dialing 6-Digit Table) 3542-Table Entries 3542-Table Entries 3542-xx: Table Data (Dial Code) Use this option to enter data into the 1 + NPA + NXX Dialing 6-Digit Table. You can enter up to 96 codes. Features •...

  • Page 880: 355X-Xxx / Tbl-B-Xxx (Npa/Nxx Dialing 3-Digit Table)

    35xx-Toll Restriction 355x-XXX / TBL-B-XXX (NPA/NXX Dialing 3-Digit Table) 3551-Table Options 355x-XXX / TBL-B-XXX (NPA/NXX Dialing 3-Digit Table) 3551-Table Options Description Use this program to set up the NPA/NXX Dialing 3-Digit Table. By default, this type of dialing is enabled because the NPA/NXX Dialing 3-Digit Table is a deny table with no entries (i.e., it denies nothing).

  • Page 881: 3552-Table Entries

    35xx-Toll Restriction 355x-XXX / TBL-B-XXX (NPA/NXX Dialing 3-Digit Table) 3552-Table Entries 3552-Table Entries 3552-xx: Table Data (Dial Code) Use this option to enter data into the NPA/NXX Dialing 3-Digit Table. You can enter up to 96 codes. Features • Toll Restriction (page 351) IntraMail Features •...

  • Page 882: 356X-Xxx-Xxx / Tbl-B Xxxxxx (Npa + Nxx Dialing 6-Digit Table)

    35xx-Toll Restriction 356x-XXX-XXX / TBL-B XXXXXX (NPA + NXX Dialing 6-Digit Table) 3561-Table Options 356x-XXX-XXX / TBL-B XXXXXX (NPA + NXX Dialing 6-Digit Table) 3561-Table Options Description Use this program to set up the NPA + NXX Dialing 6-Digit Table. By default, this type of dialing is enabled because the NPA + NXX Dialing 6-Digit Table is a deny table with no entries (i.e., it denies nothing).

  • Page 883: 3562-Table Entries

    35xx-Toll Restriction 356x-XXX-XXX / TBL-B XXXXXX (NPA + NXX Dialing 6-Digit Table) 3562-Table Entries 3562-Table Entries 3562-xx: Table Data (Dial Code) Use this option to enter data into the NPA + NXX Dialing 6-Digit Table. You can enter up to 96 codes. Features •...

  • Page 884: 36Xx-Ac Codes (Verified Account Codes Table)

    36xx-AC Codes (Verified Account Codes Table) 360x-Setup 3601-Codes 36xx-AC Codes (Verified Account Codes Table) 360x-Setup 3601-Codes Description Use this option to enter codes into the Verified Account Codes Table. When 1412-05: Verified Account Codes (page 651) is enabled, the system compares the Account Code the user dials to the entries in this table. If an entry matches, the system allows the call (provided it is not prevented by an extension’s Toll Restriction).

  • Page 885: 37Xx-Caller Id (System-Wide Options)

    37xx-Caller ID (System-Wide Options) 370x-Log Groups (Caller ID Logging Groups) 3701-Setup 37xx-Caller ID (System-Wide Options) 370x-Log Groups (Caller ID Logging Groups) 3701-Setup Description Use this program to set the record size (capacity) of each Caller ID Logging Group. Options 3701-[01-08]: Caller ID Logging Group Size (CID Group 1 Log Size) Determine the total number of Caller ID records that can be stored in each Caller ID Group.

  • Page 886: 371X-Callback

    37xx-Caller ID (System-Wide Options) 371x-Callback 3711-Route 371x-Callback 3711-Route Description Use this program to set up the Caller ID callback route. Options 3711-01: Caller ID Callback Route Type (Route Type) Use this option to specify the type of route used for Caller ID callbacks (line or Line Group). Features •...

  • Page 887: 3711-01: Caller Id Callback Group

    37xx-Caller ID (System-Wide Options) 371x-Callback 3711-Route 3711-01: Caller ID Callback Group (Callback Group) For a type 2 (Line Group) Caller ID callback route, use this option to select the Line Group (90-98) the sys- tem will use when placing the callback. Features •...

  • Page 888: 3712-Treatment Options (Caller Id Callback Dial Treatment Options)

    37xx-Caller ID (System-Wide Options) 371x-Callback 3712-Treatment Options (Caller ID Callback Dial Treatment Options) 3712-Treatment Options (Caller ID Callback Dial Treatment Options) Description Use this program to set the Caller ID Dial Treatment options. Options 3712-01: Initialize Caller ID Dial Treatment Tables (Initialize Table) Use this option to initialize the 3713-Home NPA’s (Home Area Code Table) (page 860), the 3714-HNPA Exceptions (Home Area Code Exception List Table) (page 861), and the 3715-FNPA Exceptions (Foreign...

  • Page 889: 3712-03: Home Area Code Exception List Type

    37xx-Caller ID (System-Wide Options) 371x-Callback 3712-Treatment Options (Caller ID Callback Dial Treatment Options) 3712-03: Home Area Code Exception List Type (HNPA Exception Type) Use this option to set the Home Area Code Exception List type (toll or local). Features • Caller ID Logging (page 68) IntraMail Features •...

  • Page 890: 3713-Home Npa's (Home Area Code Table)

    37xx-Caller ID (System-Wide Options) 371x-Callback 3713-Home NPA’s (Home Area Code Table) 3713-Home NPA’s (Home Area Code Table) Description Use this program to set up the Caller ID Home Area Code (HNPA) Table. Options 3713-[01-16]: Home Area Code Table Data (xx HNPA #x) Use this option to specify your system’s home area code.

  • Page 891: 3714-Hnpa Exceptions (Home Area Code Exception List Table)

    37xx-Caller ID (System-Wide Options) 371x-Callback 3714-HNPA Exceptions (Home Area Code Exception List Table) 3714-HNPA Exceptions (Home Area Code Exception List Table) Description Use this program to set up the Caller ID Home Area Code (HNPA) Exception List Table. Options 3714-[01-96]: Home Area Code Exception List Table Data (xx Dial Code) Use this option to identify which (if any) calls within your home area code are toll calls.

  • Page 892: 3715-Fnpa Exceptions (Foreign Area Code Exception List Table)

    37xx-Caller ID (System-Wide Options) 371x-Callback 3715-FNPA Exceptions (Foreign Area Code Exception List Table) 3715-FNPA Exceptions (Foreign Area Code Exception List Table) Description Use this program to set up the Caller ID Foreign Area Code (FNPA) Exception List Table. Options 3715-[01-96]: Foreign Area Code Exception List Table Data (xx Dial Code) If your dialing area has calls in an adjacent area code that are local calls, enter those codes in this table.

  • Page 893: Voice Mail Options: 4101-4231 ◆ 863

    41xx-Configuration 410x-System (Voice Mail System Options) 4101-Type Voice Mail Options: 4101-4231 41xx-Configuration 410x-System (Voice Mail System Options) 4101-Type Description Use this program to set the voice mail type and master number. Options 4101-01: Voice Mail Type (VM Type) Use this option to set the type of voice mail connected to your system. Features •...

  • Page 894: 4101-02: Voice Mail Master Number

    41xx-Configuration 410x-System (Voice Mail System Options) 4101-Type 4101-02: Voice Mail Master Number (VM UCD Master) Use this option to set the voice mail master extension number (e.g., 700). In most installations, you should not change this option from its default setting (700). Features •...

  • Page 895: 411X-Ports (Voice Mail Port Setup)

    41xx-Configuration 411x-Ports (Voice Mail Port Setup) 4111-Options (Voice Mail Port Options) 411x-Ports (Voice Mail Port Setup) 4111-Options (Voice Mail Port Options) Description Use this program to enter the voice mail port name as well as set the voice mail Class of Service and Toll Restriction Level.

  • Page 896: 4111-03: Voice Mail Port Toll Restriction Level (Day)

    41xx-Configuration 411x-Ports (Voice Mail Port Setup) 4111-Options (Voice Mail Port Options) 4111-03: Voice Mail Port Toll Restriction Level (Day) (Day Toll Level) Use this option to set the day mode Toll Restriction Level for all voice mail ports. This allows you to restrict Message Notification callouts placed during the day.

  • Page 897: Name Programming Chart

    41xx-Configuration 411x-Ports (Voice Mail Port Setup) 4111-Options (Voice Mail Port Options) Name Programming Chart Name Programming Chart Press a key the indicated number of times for desired character 1 Time 2 Times 3 Times 4 Times 5 Times 6 Times 7 Times 8 Times 9 Times...

  • Page 898: 4112-Off Hook (Voice Mail Port Off Hook Options)

    41xx-Configuration 411x-Ports (Voice Mail Port Setup) 4112-Off Hook (Voice Mail Port Off Hook Options) 4112-Off Hook (Voice Mail Port Off Hook Options) Description Use this program to set the voice mail dial 9 group and operator extension. Options 4112-01: Outgoing Dial 9 Group (Dial 9 Group) Use this option to specify the dial-9 group for voice mail ports.

  • Page 899: 4113-Line Access (Voice Mail Port Outgoing Line Access)

    41xx-Configuration 411x-Ports (Voice Mail Port Setup) 4113-Line Access (Voice Mail Port Outgoing Line Access) 4113-Line Access (Voice Mail Port Outgoing Line Access) Description Use this program to set the voice mail outgoing line access. Options 4113-xx: Outgoing Line xx Access (Line xx Access) Use this option to set the voice mail port’s access options for lines (no access, incoming only, outgoing only, or full access).

  • Page 900: 4114-Group Access (Outgoing Line Group Access)

    41xx-Configuration 411x-Ports (Voice Mail Port Setup) 4114-Group Access (Outgoing Line Group Access) 4114-Group Access (Outgoing Line Group Access) Description Use this program to set the voice mail Line Group access. Options 4114-xx: Outgoing Line Group xx Access (Group xx Access) Use this option to enable or disable the voice mail port’s outgoing access to each Line Group (90-98).

  • Page 901: 42Xx-Intramail

    42xx-IntraMail 420x-Options 4201-Messages (IntraMail Message Options) 42xx-IntraMail 420x-Options 4201-Messages (IntraMail Message Options) Description Use this program to set basic voice mail messaging options. Options 4201-01: Outgoing Message Length (OGM Msg Length) Use this option to set the maximum length of recorded outgoing messages. Outgoing messages include: •...

  • Page 902: 4201-02: Incoming Message Length

    42xx-IntraMail 420x-Options 4201-Messages (IntraMail Message Options) 4201-02: Incoming Message Length (ICM Msg Length) Use this option to set the maximum length of recorded incoming messages: Incoming messages include: • Conversation Record. • Extension users leaving a message in a Subscriber Mailbox. •...

  • Page 903: 4202-Notification (Message Notification Options)

    42xx-IntraMail 420x-Options 4202-Notification (Message Notification Options) 4202-Notification (Message Notification Options) Description Use this program to set the voice mail Message Notification options. Options 4202-01: Wait Between Non-Pager Callout Attempts (Notification Interval) Use this option to set the minimum time between non-pager Message Notification callouts in which the des- tination answers, says “Hello,”...

  • Page 904: 4202-03: Wait Between Busy Non-Pager Callout Attempts

    42xx-IntraMail 420x-Options 4202-Notification (Message Notification Options) 4202-03: Wait Between Busy Non-Pager Callout Attempts (Busy Notif. Interval) Use this option to set how long IntraMail will wait, after it dials a busy non-pager callout destination, before retrying the callout number. Features •...

  • Page 905: 4202-04: Wait Between Rna Non-Pager Callout Attempts

    42xx-IntraMail 420x-Options 4202-Notification (Message Notification Options) 4202-04: Wait Between RNA Non-Pager Callout Attempts (RNA Notif. Interval) Use this option to set how long IntraMail will wait, after it dials an unanswered non-pager callout destina- tion, before retrying the callout number. There are three types of unanswered non-pager callouts: If the callout rings the destination longer than the 4202-05: Wait for Answer Non-Pager Callout Attempts ❥...

  • Page 906: 4202-06: Number Of Callout Attempts

    42xx-IntraMail 420x-Options 4202-Notification (Message Notification Options) 4202-06: Number of Callout Attempts (Notification Attempts) Use this option to set how many times IntraMail will retry an incomplete Message Notification callout. This total includes unacknowledged callouts, callouts to a busy destination, and callouts to an unanswered desti- nation.

  • Page 907: 4202-07: Send Pager Callout Until Acknowledged

    42xx-IntraMail 420x-Options 4202-Notification (Message Notification Options) 4202-07: Send Pager Callout Until Acknowledged (Pager Retry Until ACK) When this option is enabled, IntraMail will continue to retry a digital pager Message Notification callout until the notification is acknowledged. If this option is disabled, IntraMail will retry a digital pager Message Notification the number of time specified in 4202-06: Number of Callout Attempts.
  • Page 908 42xx-IntraMail 420x-Options 4202-Notification (Message Notification Options) Dials the number entered in 4202-08: Digital Pager Callback Number. The system assumes that the notification number will complete dialing approximately 4 seconds after line seizure. This means that, by default, the Digital Pager Callback Number will be dialed into the pager service about 13 seconds after line seizure.

  • Page 909: 4203-Voice Prompts (Active System Voice Prompt Languages)

    42xx-IntraMail 420x-Options 4203-Voice Prompts (Active System Voice Prompt Languages) 4203-Voice Prompts (Active System Voice Prompt Languages) 4203-01: Primary Voice Prompt Language (Primary Lang) Use this option to set the primary IntraMail voice prompt language. There are six possible voice prompt lan- guages, two of which can be active at any one time.

  • Page 910: 421X-Answer Table

    42xx-IntraMail 421x-Answer Table 4211-Setup (Answer Table Setup) 421x-Answer Table 4211-Setup (Answer Table Setup) Description For each Answer Table, use this program to set the Default Mailbox, Answer Schedule Override options, and optional Answer Table linking. Options 4211-01: Default Mailbox (Default Mbox) Use this option to set the Answer Table’s Default Mailbox.

  • Page 911: 4211-03: Override Mailbox

    42xx-IntraMail 421x-Answer Table 4211-Setup (Answer Table Setup) Default • (0) - Disabled 4211-03: Override Mailbox (Override Mbox) Use this option to specify the mailbox to which Automated Attendant calls should route when you also enable 4211-02: Answer Schedule Override above. •...

  • Page 912: 4212-Schedule (Schedule Setup)

    42xx-IntraMail 421x-Answer Table 4212-Schedule (Schedule Setup) 4212-Schedule (Schedule Setup) Description Use this program to set the Answer Schedule for each Answer Table. Options 4212-[01-10]: Schedule Type (Entry xx Type) Use this option to assign a Schedule Type to the selected Answer Schedule. The Schedule Type determines how the Answer Schedule answers calls.

  • Page 913: 4212-[01-10]: Routing Mailbox Number

    42xx-IntraMail 421x-Answer Table 4212-Schedule (Schedule Setup) 4212-[01-10]: Routing Mailbox Number (Entry xx Mbox) Use this option to select the mailbox that will answer calls when this Answer Schedule is active. • If the Routing Mailbox is an Announcement Mailbox, the outside caller will hear the recorded announcement.

  • Page 914: 4212-[01-10]: Schedule End Day

    42xx-IntraMail 421x-Answer Table 4212-Schedule (Schedule Setup) 4212-[01-10]: Schedule End Day (Entry xx End Day) Use this option to specify the day of the week a type 2 (Range of Days) schedule should stop. This option does not apply to type 1 (Day of Week) and type 3 (Date) schedules. Features •...

  • Page 915: 4212-[01-10]: Schedule Start Time

    42xx-IntraMail 421x-Answer Table 4212-Schedule (Schedule Setup) 4212-[01-10]: Schedule Start Time (Entry xx Start Time HH:MM) Use this option to specify the time of day the schedule should start. It applies to all schedule types. Features • None IntraMail Features • Answer Tables (page 420) Options •...

  • Page 916: [01-10]: Schedule End Time

    42xx-IntraMail 421x-Answer Table 4212-Schedule (Schedule Setup) 4212-[01-10]: Schedule End Time (Entry xx End Time HH:MM) Use this option to specify the time of day the schedule should stop. It applies to all schedule types. Features • None IntraMail Features • Answer Tables (page 420) Options •...

  • Page 917: Type 1 (Day Of Week) Schedule Example

    42xx-IntraMail 421x-Answer Table 4212-Schedule (Schedule Setup) Type 1 (Day of Week) Schedule Example Type 1 (Day of Week) Example Answer Table = 1 Schedule = 1 Schedule Type = 2 Mailbox Number = 2 Start Day = 1 End Day = 4 Start Time = 0800 End Time = 1030 Schedule = 2...

  • Page 918: Type 2 (Range Of Days) Schedule Example

    42xx-IntraMail 421x-Answer Table 4212-Schedule (Schedule Setup) Type 2 (Range of Days) Schedule Example Type 2 (Range of Days) Example Answer Table = 1 Schedule = 1 Schedule Type = 2 Mailbox Number = 2 Start Day = 1 End Day = 4 Start Time = 0830 End Time = 1700 Schedule = 2...

  • Page 919: Type 3 (Date) Schedule Example

    42xx-IntraMail 421x-Answer Table 4212-Schedule (Schedule Setup) Type 3 (Date) Schedule Example Type 3 (Date) Example Answer Table = 1 Schedule = 1 Schedule Type = 2 Mailbox Number = 2 Start Day = 2 End Day = 6 Start Time = 0800 End Time = 1700 Schedule = 2 Schedule Type = 2...

  • Page 920: 422X-Routing Mailbox

    42xx-IntraMail 422x-Routing Mailbox 4221-Setup (Routing Mailbox Setup) 422x-Routing Mailbox 4221-Setup (Routing Mailbox Setup) Description Use this program to set the Routing Mailbox type. Options 4221-01: Routing Mailbox Type (Mailbox Type) Use this option to assign a mailbox type to the selected Routing Mailbox. Routing Mailboxes can be Call Routing Mailboxes, Announcement Mailboxes, or Directory Dialing Mailboxes.

  • Page 921: 4222-Routing Options

    42xx-IntraMail 422x-Routing Mailbox 4222-Routing Options 4222-Routing Options Description Use this program to set the routing options for each Call Routing Mailbox. The entries you make in this pro- gram are valid only if the Routing Mailbox is assigned as a Call Routing Mailbox ( ) in 4221-01: Routing Mailbox Type.

  • Page 922: 4222-04: Fax Detection

    42xx-IntraMail 422x-Routing Mailbox 4222-Routing Options unanswered extension before recalling. The 1603-01: Transfer Recall Timer (page 675) has no interaction with this option. Features • None IntraMail Features • Screened Transfer (page 567) Options • 1-255 seconds • 0 causes immediate recall Default •...

  • Page 923: 4223-Announcement Opts (Announcement Mailbox Options)

    42xx-IntraMail 422x-Routing Mailbox 4223-Announcement Opts (Announcement Mailbox Options) 4223-Announcement Opts (Announcement Mailbox Options) Description If the Routing Mailbox is an Announcement Mailbox, use this program to set the Announcement Mailbox options. The entries you make in this program are valid only if the Routing Mailbox is assigned as an Announcement Mailbox ( ) in 4221-01: Routing Mailbox Type.

  • Page 924: 4223-03: Next Call Routing Mailbox

    42xx-IntraMail 422x-Routing Mailbox 4223-Announcement Opts (Announcement Mailbox Options) 4223-03: Next Call Routing Mailbox (Next CRMB) If you set up an Announcement Mailbox to answer Automated Attendant calls, use this option to provide addi- tional routing options to the Automated Attendant callers. This option interacts with 4223-01: Repeat Count and 4223-02: Hang Up After below.

  • Page 925: 4224-Directory Options (Directory Dialing Mailbox Options)

    42xx-IntraMail 422x-Routing Mailbox 4224-Directory Options (Directory Dialing Mailbox Options) 4224-Directory Options (Directory Dialing Mailbox Options) Description If the Routing Mailbox is a Directory Dialing Mailbox, use this option to set the Directory Dialing options. The entries you make in this program are valid only if the Routing Mailbox is assigned as a Directory Dial- ing Mailbox ( ) in 4221-01: Routing Mailbox Type.

  • Page 926: 4224-03: Screened Transfer Timeout

    42xx-IntraMail 422x-Routing Mailbox 4224-Directory Options (Directory Dialing Mailbox Options) 4224-03: Screened Transfer Timeout (STRF Timeout) Use this option to set how long a Screened Transfer (STRF) from the Directory Dialing Mailbox will ring an unanswered extension before recalling. Features • None IntraMail Features •...

  • Page 927: 4224-04: Extension Name Match

    42xx-IntraMail 422x-Routing Mailbox 4224-Directory Options (Directory Dialing Mailbox Options) 4224-04: Extension Name Match (Name Match) Use this option to determine which portion of the extension’s programmed name Directory Dialing will use to route the call. The options are (first) or (last).

  • Page 928: 4224-06: Transfer Options

    42xx-IntraMail 422x-Routing Mailbox 4224-Directory Options (Directory Dialing Mailbox Options) 4224-06: Transfer Options (Transfer Option) Use this option to define the action Directory Dialing uses when routing a call (Screened or Unscreened Transfer) Features • None IntraMail Features • Directory Dialing (page 469) Options •...

  • Page 929: 4224-07: Next Call Routing Mailbox

    42xx-IntraMail 422x-Routing Mailbox 4224-Directory Options (Directory Dialing Mailbox Options) 4224-07: Next Call Routing Mailbox (Next CRMB) Use this option to specify the Next Call Routing Mailbox for the Directory Dialing Mailbox. If a Next Call Routing Mailbox is specified, the following will occur: If the caller dials 0 while listening to the Directory Dialing Message, they route to the 0 action pro- ■...

  • Page 930: 4224-09: Fax Transfer Extension

    42xx-IntraMail 422x-Routing Mailbox 4224-Directory Options (Directory Dialing Mailbox Options) 4224-09: Fax Transfer Extension (Fax Transfer Ext) Use this option to specify the extension number of the fax machine associated with the Directory Dialing Mailbox. When the Direct Dialing Mailbox answers a call and detects fax (CNG) tone, it automatically transfers the call to this extension.

  • Page 931: 423X-Dial Actions (Dial Action Table Options)

    42xx-IntraMail 423x-Dial Actions (Dial Action Table Options) 4231-Digit Assignment 423x-Dial Actions (Dial Action Table Options) 4231-Digit Assignment Description Use this program to set up the IntraMail Dial Action Tables. The Dial Action Table defines the options than an Automated Attendant caller can dial. A Dial Action Table is associated with a Call Routing Mailbox, which is in turn associated with an Answer Table.
  • Page 932 42xx-IntraMail 423x-Dial Actions (Dial Action Table Options) 4231-Digit Assignment The following table shows the Dial Action Table default assignments. Dial Action Table Default Settings Dial Action Table 1 Dial Action Tables 2-16 UTRF to 300 (Unscreened Transfer to 300) (Undefined) (Undefined) (Undefined) (Undefined)

  • Page 933: 4231-01: Digit Xx Action

    42xx-IntraMail 423x-Dial Actions (Dial Action Table Options) 4231-Digit Assignment Options 4231-01: Digit xx Action (Digit x Action) Use this option to assign the actions (functions) to the keys that Automated Attendant callers can dial. See Dial Action Table Actions (page 905) for more on each action. Features •...
  • Page 934 42xx-IntraMail 423x-Dial Actions (Dial Action Table Options) 4231-Digit Assignment • Transfer to a UCD Group (page 585) • Undefined Routing (page 586) • Unscreened Transfer (page 587) Options • Extension number using 0-9, # and * • N for no routing (press Feature Key 1) •...

  • Page 935: Strf Action - Screened Transfer (1)

    42xx-IntraMail 423x-Dial Actions (Dial Action Table Options) 4231-Digit Assignment Dial Action Table Actions STRF Action - Screened Transfer (1) (STRF) Use this action to allow an Automated Attendant caller to place a Screened Transfer to an extension. After an Automated Attendant caller dials an extension, IntraMail calls (screens) the destination to see if the transfer can go through.

  • Page 936: Utrf Action - Unscreened Transfer (2)

    42xx-IntraMail 423x-Dial Actions (Dial Action Table Options) 4231-Digit Assignment UTRF Action - Unscreened Transfer (2) (UTRF) Use this action to allow an Automated Attendant caller to place an Unscreened Transfer to an extension. This is similar to telephone system unscreened transfers in which the transferring party immediately extends the call.

  • Page 937: Rec1 Action - Quick Message With Greeting (3)

    42xx-IntraMail 423x-Dial Actions (Dial Action Table Options) 4231-Digit Assignment REC1 Action - Quick Message With Greeting (3) (REC1) Use this action to allow an Automated Attendant caller to leave a Quick Message at an extension. With this action, the caller will hear the extension’s greeting prior to leaving the message. Routing To have the caller leave a quick Message at a specific extension, the corresponding Routing option should be the extension number.

  • Page 938: Rec2 Action - Quick Message Without Greeting (4)

    42xx-IntraMail 423x-Dial Actions (Dial Action Table Options) 4231-Digit Assignment REC2 Action - Quick Message Without Greeting (4) (REC2) Use this action to allow an Automated Attendant caller to leave a Quick Message at an extension. With this action, the caller will not hear the extension’s greeting prior to leaving the message. Instead, the caller hears the voice prompt “Recording”...

  • Page 939: Logon Action - Log Onto Voice Mail (5)

    42xx-IntraMail 423x-Dial Actions (Dial Action Table Options) 4231-Digit Assignment LOGON Action - Log Onto Voice Mail (5) (LOGON) Use this key action to allow an Automated Attendant caller to log onto voice mail. Depending on program- ming (see Routing below), the caller is logged directly into a Subscriber Mailbox or is prompted to enter a Subscriber Mailbox of their own choosing.

  • Page 940: Hang Up Action (6)

    42xx-IntraMail 423x-Dial Actions (Dial Action Table Options) 4231-Digit Assignment Hang Up Action (6) (HNGUP) When an Automated Attendant caller presses a key assigned to this action, IntraMail says “Goodbye” and immediately hangs up. Routing There is no entry required in the corresponding Routing option. Features •...

  • Page 941: Goto Action - Go To Mailbox (7)

    42xx-IntraMail 423x-Dial Actions (Dial Action Table Options) 4231-Digit Assignment GOTO Action - Go to Mailbox (7) (GOTO) Use this option to provide Automated Attendant callers with the ability to route to Routing Mailboxes. For example, a caller can dial a digit for Sales, and then go to the Call Routing or Announcement Mailbox that provides the dialing options and instructions for Sales.

  • Page 942: Und Action - Undefined Routing (0)

    42xx-IntraMail 423x-Dial Actions (Dial Action Table Options) 4231-Digit Assignment UND Action - Undefined Routing (0) (UND) Use this key action if you want a key to have no routing (no operation). When an Automated Attendant caller presses an undefined key, they hear, “That is an invalid entry.” The caller can then dial another option. Features •...

  • Page 943: Digits

    42xx-IntraMail 423x-Dial Actions (Dial Action Table Options) 4231-Digit Assignment Dial Action Table Routing Options Digits (0-9, #, and *) Use Dial Action Table digits to route an Automated Attendant call to a specific location (such as an exten- sion). For example, to set up a STRF Action to route to extension 305, for digit 3 enter STRF for the Action and 305 for the corresponding Routing.

  • Page 944: No Routing

    42xx-IntraMail 423x-Dial Actions (Dial Action Table Options) 4231-Digit Assignment No Routing Use the N option when you want no Automated Attendant routing to automatically occur. This can be used with the LOGON action when you want to prompt the caller to enter a mailbox number. To do this for the # key (for example), for the # key enter LOGON for the Action and N for the corresponding Routing.

  • Page 945: Maintenance Options: 9001 - 9042

    90xx-Utilities 900x-Reset (Reset Utilities) 9001-System (System Reset) Maintenance Options: 9001 - 9042 90xx-Utilities 900x-Reset (Reset Utilities) 9001-System (System Reset) Description Use this program to reset the system. Options 9001-01: System Reset (System) Use this option to reset the system. A reset will restart the system with all the programming intact. Features •...

  • Page 946: 9002-Station (Station Reset)

    90xx-Utilities 900x-Reset (Reset Utilities) 9002-Station (Station Reset) 9002-Station (Station Reset) Description Use this program to reset a station port. 9002-01: Station Reset (Station) Use this option to reset a station port. A reset will restart the specific extension with all the programming intact.

  • Page 947: 901X-Initialize (Initialize Utilities)

    90xx-Utilities 901x-Initialize (Initialize Utilities) 9011-System (Initialize System) 901x-Initialize (Initialize Utilities) 9011-System (Initialize System) Description Use this program to initialize the system. Options 9011-01: System Initialization (System) Use this option to initialize the system database. Warning Initializing the system erases all your programmed entries and replaces them with the factory-installed default values.

  • Page 948: 9012-Toll Restrictions (Initialize Toll Restriction)

    90xx-Utilities 901x-Initialize (Initialize Utilities) 9012-Toll Restrictions (Initialize Toll Restriction) 9012-Toll Restrictions (Initialize Toll Restriction) Description Use this program to initialize Toll Restriction. Options 9012-01: Initialize Toll Restriction (Toll Restrict) Use this option to initialize Toll Restriction. You should initialize Toll Restriction before using if for the first time.

  • Page 949: 9013-Cid Logs (Initialize Caller Id Logs)

    90xx-Utilities 901x-Initialize (Initialize Utilities) 9013-CID Logs (Initialize Caller ID Logs) 9013-CID Logs (Initialize Caller ID Logs) Description Use this program to initialize the Caller ID logs system-wide. Options 9013-01: Initialize Caller ID Logs (CID Logs) Use this option to initialize (clear) all the Caller ID logs system-wide. This utility clears all the personal logs as well as all the group logs.

  • Page 950: 9014-Ring Tones (Initialize Ring Tones)

    90xx-Utilities 901x-Initialize (Initialize Utilities) 9014-Ring Tones (Initialize Ring Tones) 9014-Ring Tones (Initialize Ring Tones) Description Use this program to initialize Distinctive Ringing system-wide. Options 9014-01: Initialize Ring Tones (Ring) Use this option to initialize all ring tones system-wide. This returns all ring tones on all extensions to their default settings.

  • Page 951: 902X-Copy

    90xx-Utilities 902x-Copy 9021-Station Copy 902x-Copy 9021-Station Copy Description Use this program to copy data from an extension to another extension or range of extensions. Options 9021-01: Station Copy (Station Copy) This option allows you to copy station data from one extension to another extension or range of extensions. The table below shows the programs you can copy.
  • Page 952 90xx-Utilities 902x-Copy 9021-Station Copy Using 9021-01: Station Copy To copy data from an extension to another extension or range of extensions: Access option 9021-01. You see: Copy Program Press HOLD and select the option (01-23) corresponding to the station program you want to copy. •...

  • Page 953: 9022-Line Copy

    90xx-Utilities 902x-Copy 9022-Line Copy 9022-Line Copy Description Use this program to copy data from a line to another line or range of lines. Options 9022-01: Line Copy (Line Copy) This option allows you to copy data from one line to another line or range of lines. The table below shows the programs you can copy.
  • Page 954 90xx-Utilities 902x-Copy 9022-Line Copy Using 9022-01: Line Copy To copy data from a line to another line or range of lines: Access option 9022-01. You see: Copy Program Press HOLD and select the option (01-12) corresponding to the line program you want to copy. •...

  • Page 955: 903X-Swap Ports

    90xx-Utilities 903x-Swap Ports 9031-Station Swap 903x-Swap Ports 9031-Station Swap Description Use this program swap two extensions. This swaps all the programming between the two extensions, includ- ing the extension number and station name. With 9031-Station Swap, it is no longer necessary to install and wire cross-connect blocks to easily swap two extensions.

  • Page 956: 9032-Line Swap

    90xx-Utilities 903x-Swap Ports 9032-Line Swap 9032-Line Swap Description Use this program swap two line circuits. For example, if you swap line 1 with line 2, line 1 now uses the telco circuit formerly assigned to line 2 and vise versa. With 9032-Line Swap, it is no longer necessary to install and wire cross-connect blocks to easily swap two lines.

  • Page 957: 904X-Backup/Restore

    90xx-Utilities 904x-Backup/Restore 9041-Backup 904x-Backup/Restore 9041-Backup Description Use this option to back up (save) the system database to a CompactFlash Card plugged into the IntraMail CompactFlash Card slot. You can then restore (load) the system database using 9042-Restore (page 928). You can store the system database on the IntraMail CompactFlash Card or on a separate FAT16 or FAT32 formatted CompactFlash card.

  • Page 958: 9042-Restore

    90xx-Utilities 904x-Backup/Restore 9042-Restore 9042-Restore Description Use this option to restore (load) the database previously backed-up (saved) on a CompactFlash Card using 9041-Backup (page 927). Note that you can store the system database on the IntraMail CompactFlash Card or on a separate FAT16 or FAT32 formatted CompactFlash card. The entire system database uses about 500 Kbytes Of Compact Flash memory.

  • Page 959: Dsx Program List

    Program List DSX Program List DSX Program List System Options: 1001-1702 10xx-Configuration 100x-System 1001-Version 1001-01: System Type 1001-02: Software Version 1001-03: DSP Version 101x-ID 1011-Name 1011-01: System Name 1011-02: Telephone Number Name Programming Chart 102x-Time 1021-Set Time and Date 1021-01: System Time 1021-02: System Date 1022-Daylight Savings Time 1022-01: Automatic Daylight Savings Time Setting...
  • Page 960 DSX Program List 1101-01: Baud Rate 1102-Modem Settings 1103-USB Settings 1104-Ethernet Setup 1104-01: System IP Address 1104-02: System Subnet Mask 1104-03: Default Gateway 111x-Tones 1111-DTMF Setup 1111-01: Manual DTMF Tone On 1111-02: Manual DTMF Tone Off 1111-03: Speed Dial DTMF Tone On 1111-04: Speed Dial DTMF Tone Off 12xx-Slots 120x-Stations...
  • Page 961 DSX Program List 1401-01: System Speed Dial Access 1401-02: Extended Ring 1401-03: Privacy 1401-04: ACD Supervisor 1401-05: Soft Keys 1401-06: Conversation Record 1401-07: DND Override 1401-08: Receive DID Calls 1401-09: Receive DID Camp-On 1401-10: Name Programming 1401-11: Language Programming 1401-12: Call Screening 1401-13: Hotline Automatic Transfer 1402-Access 1402-01: Forced Line Disconnect...
  • Page 962 DSX Program List 1411-01: Camp-On to Busy Lines 1411-02: Line Queue Priority 1411-03: Automatic Hold 1411-04: Enhanced Last Number Redial 1411-05: Unsupervised Conference 1412-Toll Restriction 1412-01: Walking Class of Service (Day) 1412-02: Walking Class of Service (Night) 1412-03: Station Locking 1412-04: Forced Account Codes 1412-05: Verified Account Codes 1412-06: Account Codes for Toll Calls Only...
  • Page 963 DSX Program List 1541-03: SMDR Language 155x-Account Codes 1551-Setup 1551-01: Dial # to Enter Account Codes 1551-02: Allow Account Codes in Speed Dial Bins 1551-03: Show Account Codes on Telephone Display 1551-04: Account Code Toll Restriction Level 16xx-Timers 160x-Feature Timers 1601-Incoming Call Timers 1601-01: Line No Answer Timer 1601-02: DIL No Answer Timer...
  • Page 964 DSX Program List 1612-07: Shunt Pause Timer 1613-Loop Control 1613-01: Loop Current Detection Timer 1613-02: Far End Disconnect Timer 1613-03: Power Failure Recovery Detect Timer 162x-SLI (Analog Single Line) Timers 1621-Incoming 1621-01: Minimum DP Break Timer 1621-02: Maximum DP Break Timer 1621-03: Minimum DP Make Timer 1621-04: Maximum DP Make Timer 1621-05: Minimum Hookflash Timer...
  • Page 965 DSX Program List 1651-04: Transmit Forced Clear Signal Timer 1651-05: Transmit Seize Signal (BZL) Timer 1651-06: Transmit Double Answer (BZL) Timer 1652-RX (Receive Timers) 1652-01: Receive Minimum Seize Acknowledge Timer 1652-02: Receive Maximum Seize Acknowledge Timer 1652-03: Receive Minimum Digit Acknowledge Timer 1652-04: Receive Maximum Digit Acknowledge Timer 1652-05: Receive Minimum Answer Timer 1652-06: Receive Maximum Answer Timer...
  • Page 966 DSX Program List Stations: 2101-2501 21xx-Configuration 210x-Setup 2101-Type 2101-01: Station Type 2101-02: Station Name 2101-03: Station Display Language 2101-04: Door Chime Selection 2101-05: Outgoing ANI ID 2101-06: Door Relay Assignment 2102-Access 2102-01: Class of Service 2102-02: Station Toll Level (Day) 2102-03: Station Toll Level (Night) 2102-04: User Programming Access Level 2102-05: Station PIN Code...
  • Page 967 DSX Program List 2113-02: Ring Group 2113-03: Pickup Group 2113-04: Privacy Group 2113-05: Page Group (Zone) 2114-Off Hook Options 2114-01: Prime Line Type 2114-01: Prime Line Key 2114-01: Prime Line Line 2114-01: Prime Line Group 2114-02: Station Ring Down Type 2114-02: Station Ring Down Destination 2114-03: Station’s Operator Extension Number 2115-Hunting and Overflow Options...
  • Page 968 DSX Program List 2143-Options 2143-01: Message Playback Order 2143-02: Auto Erase/Save of Messages 2143-03: Auto Time Stamp 2143-04: Message Waiting Lamp 2143-05: Recording Conversation Beep 2144-Auto-Attendant (Automated Attendant) 2144-01: Auto Attendant Do Not Disturb 2144-02: Forced Unscreened Transfer 2144-03: Dialing Option 2144-04: Next Call Routing Mailbox 2144-05: Directory List Number 215x-Speed Dial (Personal)
  • Page 969 DSX Program List 231x-IntraMail (UCD Group Mailbox) 2311-Type 2311-01: UCD Group Mailbox Type 2311-01: UCD Group Routing Mailbox Number 2312-Setup 2312-01: Number of Messages 2312-02: Message Retention 2312-03: System Administrator 2312-04: UCD Group Mailbox Voice Prompt Language 2313-Playback 2313-01: Message Playback Order 2313-02: Auto Erase/Save of Messages 2313-03: Auto Time Stamp 2313-04: Message Waiting Lamp...
  • Page 970 DSX Program List Lines: 3101-3715 31xx-Configuration 310x-Setup 3101-Type 3101-01: Line Type 3101-02: Line Name 3101-03: DTMF Dialing 3101-04: PBX Line 3101-05: E1 Signaling Type 3101-06: MFC Signaling Type 3102-Access 3102-01: Line Class of Service 3102-02: Line Toll Level 3103-Settings 3103-01: Transmit Gain 3103-02: Receive Gain 3103-03: Loop Length 3103-04: Tandem Calls...
  • Page 971 DSX Program List 3131-02: IntraMail Answer Table Assignment 3131-03: Line Voice Prompt Language 314x-TIE Line 3141-Dialing 3141-01: Tie Line Caller’s Outbound Dial 9 Group 3141-02: Tie Line Caller’s Operator Extension 3142-Line Access 3142-[01-64]: Tie Line Caller’s Outbound Line Access 3143-Group Access 3143-[01-64]: Tie Line Caller’s Outbound Line Group Access 32xx-Groups 320x-Setup...
  • Page 972 DSX Program List 3531-01: Initialize Table 3531-02: Table Type (Allow or Deny) 3532-Table Entries 3532-xx: Table Data 354x-1+XXX-XXX / TBL-A XXXXXXX (1 + NPA + NXX Dialing 6-Digit Table) 3541-Table Options 3541-01: Initialize Table 3541-02: Table Type (Allow or Deny) 3542-Table Entries 3542-xx: Table Data 355x-XXX / TBL-B-XXX (NPA/NXX Dialing 3-Digit Table)
  • Page 973 DSX Program List Voice Mail Options: 4101-4231 41xx-Configuration 410x-System (Voice Mail System Options) 4101-Type 4101-01: Voice Mail Type 4101-02: Voice Mail Master Number 411x-Ports (Voice Mail Port Setup) 4111-Options (Voice Mail Port Options) 4111-01: Voice Mail Port Name 4111-02: Voice Mail Port Class of Service 4111-03: Voice Mail Port Toll Restriction Level (Day) 4111-04: Voice Mail Port Toll Restriction Level (Night) Name Programming Chart...
  • Page 974 DSX Program List 4212-[01-10]: Schedule Run Date 4212-[01-10]: Schedule Start Time 4212-[01-10]: Schedule End Time Type 1 (Day of Week) Schedule Example Type 2 (Range of Days) Schedule Example Type 3 (Date) Schedule Example 422x-Routing Mailbox 4221-Setup (Routing Mailbox Setup) 4221-01: Routing Mailbox Type 4221-02: Routing Mailbox Voice Prompt Language 4222-Routing Options...
  • Page 975 DSX Program List Maintenance Options: 9001 - 9042 90xx-Utilities 900x-Reset (Reset Utilities) 9001-System (System Reset) 9001-01: System Reset 9002-Station (Station Reset) 9002-01: Station Reset 901x-Initialize (Initialize Utilities) 9011-System (Initialize System) 9011-01: System Initialization 9012-Toll Restrictions (Initialize Toll Restriction) 9012-01: Initialize Toll Restriction 9013-CID Logs (Initialize Caller ID Logs) 9013-01: Initialize Caller ID Logs 9014-Ring Tones (Initialize Ring Tones)
  • Page 976 DSX Program List DSX Program List...

  • Page 977: Index

    Index . . . Call Forwarding Off Premises Index Call Forwarding Toggle in a Personal Speed Dial ..Account Codes Call Routing . . . And Emergency Calls . . . Flexible . . . Last Number Redial and Save .
  • Page 978 Index . . . Dial Tone Detection . . . Dialing by Name . . . Getting Recorded Help . . . Direct Inward Dialing . . . Go to a Mailbox . . . ANI/DNIS Support . . . GOTO .
  • Page 979 Index Menu . . . Instruction . . . Key Ring . . . Mailbox Options . . . Main Message ..Lamping for Messages Announcement ..Language Selection Listen .
  • Page 980 Index ..Priority vs. Prime Line Off Hook Signaling Overflow Rotary Dialing Callers ..To Voice Mail Automatic Routing . . . Voice Mail Routing . . . Undefined Routing a Call .
  • Page 981 Index ..Voice Over Terminal Hunting ..Tie Lines Voice Prompting Messages . . . Time and Date Voice Prompts ..Time and Date Stamp .
  • Page 982 Index 952 ◆ Index DSX Software Manual...
  • Page 983 NEC Unified Solutions, Inc. 4 Forest Parkway, Shelton, CT 06484 Tel: 800-365-1928 Fax: 203-926-5458 www.necunifiedsolutions.com Other Important Telephone Numbers Sales: ........203-926-5450 Customer Service: .
  • Page 984 NEC Unified Solutions, Inc. 4 Forest Parkway, Shelton, CT 06484 TEL: 203-926-5400 FAX: 203-929-0535 www.necunifiedsolutions.com (1093100) June 9, 2006, Rev 3 Printed in U.S.A.

This manual is also suitable for:

Dsx-40Dsx-80Dsx-160

Table of Contents

Save PDF